JP2011015999A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a slot machine capable of suppressing the storage capacity of table data used for derivation control of display results while attaining the diversification of the display results of a variable display device.SOLUTION: A CPU 41a performs stop control by a table plus control system when the result of an internal lottery is a bonus plus a small prize pattern. At this time, the CPU selects sliding piece number data corresponding to the prize-winning bonus, retrieves a stop operation position which is a stop position in which the winning small prize pattern is lined up on a prize-winning line. The sliding piece number of a virtual slipping piece table is updated as for the stop operation position.

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable.

  In this type of slot machine, when winning a prize in the internal lottery performed at the start of the game, control is performed so that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning prizes is won for a plurality of reels, and the prize is won in the internal lottery. In general, control is performed so that combinations of symbols corresponding to unseen winnings are not made, and a winning is generated in accordance with the combined symbols.

  As described above, there are mainly a control method and a table method as a method for controlling the combination of symbols corresponding to winning according to the result of the internal lottery so as not to be aligned or aligned. In the control method, when a stop operation is performed, it is determined whether or not the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is located within the drawing range to the winning line, and if the symbol is within the drawing range, the symbol is drawn into the winning line. If the symbol that does not correspond to the lottery result is located on the winning line, the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped on the winning line. The kick control is performed so as not to occur (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Further, in the table system, a reel table in which a symbol (the number of sliding symbols) to be stopped on the winning line is stored in advance at every stop operation timing is stored in advance, and when the stop operation is performed, the lottery result of the game is displayed. By referring to the corresponding reel table and performing control to stop the symbols determined on the reel table on the winning line at the timing when the stop operation is performed, the above-described pull-in control and kick-off control are realized. (For example, refer to Patent Document 2).

JP-A-2-283385 JP 2003-325753 A

  However, in the case of using a control method as a reel stop control as in the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, the pull-in control and the kick-off control are uniquely performed according to the result of the internal lottery. The display result was monotonous and lacked interest. On the other hand, in the case of using a table system such as the slot machine described in Patent Document 2, although the display result can be various, the result of the internal lottery is that the stop time (all reels are rotating, either It is necessary to prepare a separate table for each situation, such as when one reel is already stopped, when any two reels are already stopped, etc.) There was a problem that the storage capacity of the table data would be enormous.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and is a slot machine capable of diversifying the display results of the variable display device and suppressing the storage capacity of table data used for display result derivation control. The purpose is to provide.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
Variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C) capable of deriving and displaying display results in a plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be individually identified 2R),
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number (1, 3) of bets for one game using game values (medals), and display results are derived in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is ended by being displayed, and a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived (when the start switch 7 is detected), a special prize (special role) accompanied by a transition to a special gaming state (big bonus) advantageous to the player, and A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow the generation of a plurality of types of winnings including a bonus winning (small role) accompanied by a game value,
Respective derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
When the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at each operation timing with respect to each of a plurality of predetermined operation timings (stop operation positions), the operation is derived to the variable display area. Derivation control table storage means (stop control table stored in ROM 41b) for storing a plurality of predetermined derivation control tables (slip frame number data) so that the display result can be specified;
Select one of a plurality of derivation control tables stored in the derivation control table storage unit according to the determination result of the predetermination unit (corresponding to the stop position of the stopped reel as a result of the internal lottery) Derivation control table selection means for selecting sliding frame number data to be
The pre-determining means is allowed to generate from the display result (stop position according to the number of sliding frames from 0 to 4) that can be derived to the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operating means at the operation timing when the derivation operating means is operated. Then, a display result search means for searching for a winning display result (a stop position where the winning combination is aligned with the winning line) corresponding to the determined winning, and specifying the winning display result,
First derivation control for deriving the display result specified from the derivation control table (control for stopping the stop position specified from the sliding frame number data), or deriving the winning display result specified by the display result search means Derivation control selection means for selecting any one of the second derivation control to be performed (control for stopping the stop position specified from the search result);
When the derivation operation means is operated, a derivation control means (reel stop) that performs control for deriving the display result to the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on the derivation control selected by the derivation control selection means. Control), and
With
The derivation control table selection means is a situation in which it is determined by the pre-decision means that the occurrence of both the special prize and the prize-winning is permitted (when a special role and a small role are won simultaneously, or a special role Select the same derivation control table as when it is determined that only the special winning is allowed (when the small role is won during the carryover of the selected) (select the sliding frame number data corresponding to the special role) )
The derivation control selection means includes
A situation in which it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of both the special prize and the prize-winning prize is allowed (when a special role and a small role are won at the same time, or a small role is won while the special role is being carried over) The display result specified from the derivation control table is a winning display result corresponding to the special winning, and the winning result display result corresponding only to the awarded winning is specified by the display result search means or When the display result search means does not identify the winning display result corresponding to the winning prize (the stop position specified from the sliding frame number data is the stop position where the selected special combination stops at the winning line, The stop position specified from the result is the stop position where only the winning small role stops on the winning line or the stopped position where the selected small role does not stop on the winning line The case), then selecting the first derivation control (control to stop the stop position identified from the sliding frame number data),
A situation in which it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of both the special prize and the prize-winning prize is allowed (when a special role and a small role are won at the same time, or a small role is won while the special role is being carried over) The display result specified from the derivation control table is a display result that does not correspond to the special prize or the prize winning, and the prize display result corresponding to the prize winning is specified by the display result search means. (The stop position identified from the data for the number of sliding frames is a stop position where neither the winning special role nor the small role stops on the winning line, and the stop position specified from the search result is the winning position for the winning small role. The second derivation control (control to stop the stop position specified from the search result) in the case of a stop position at which the line stops)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily design the display result when it is determined that the special prize is allowed to be generated, and when it is determined that only the special prize is allowed to be generated, as well as the special prize and the award winning. It is possible to perform control to derive the display result according to the determination result without separately preparing the derivation control table and to determine whether to allow both occurrences. The storage capacity of the derivation control table can be reduced while diversifying the display results of the display device.
The derivation control selection means has a display result specified from the derivation control table in a situation where it is determined by the prior determination means that the occurrence of both the special prize and the award prize is permitted. A winning display result corresponding only to the winning prize, and when the winning result display result corresponding to only the winning prize is specified by the display result search means, the display result specified from the derivation control table is the special winning and the winning prize display result. If a winning display result corresponding to both of the winning prizes and the winning result display result corresponding to both the special winning and the winning prize is specified by the display result search means, the first derivation control, the second Any of the derivation controls may be selected.
In addition, the derivation control selection unit may display a display result specified from the derivation control table in a situation where the predetermination unit has determined that the occurrence of both the special prize and the award prize is permitted. When a display result corresponding to both the special prize and the awarded prize is specified by the display result search means, the display result is displayed in all of the variable display areas. It is possible to select the second derivation control unless there are special circumstances such as the occurrence of both the special prize and the awarded prize at the stage of derivation or the occurrence of an unacceptable prize. Preferably, it is possible to derive a display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means.

A slot machine according to claim 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1,
The derivation control table storage means (the stop control table stored in the ROM 41b) is the derivation operation means when it is determined by the pre-decision means that the generation of winning prizes (small roles) is allowed independently. Derivation control table (sliding frame number data) corresponding to a predetermined award (bell: a small role that is not missed when winning alone) that can always derive a corresponding winning display result regardless of the timing at which the is operated )
The derivation control means, when the derivation operation means is operated, when it is determined by the pre-decision means that the generation of only the predetermined prize winning is permitted (when the bell is won), Based on the second derivation control (control to stop the stop position specified from the search result), control is performed to derive the display result to the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, if it is determined that the occurrence of a winning that is not missed is allowed, the relationship with the display result (chance) when the special winning is missed is weak, so the derivation control table is used. For winnings that do not need to be derived from the display result and are not missed in this way, the display result is controlled without using the derivation control table, so the storage capacity of the derivation control table is effectively reduced. It becomes possible.

The slot machine according to claim 3 of the present invention is
Variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C) capable of deriving and displaying display results in a plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be individually identified 2R),
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number (1, 3) of bets for one game using game values (medals), and display results are derived in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is ended by being displayed, and a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived (when the start switch 7 is detected), a special prize (special role) accompanied by a transition to a special gaming state (big bonus) advantageous to the player, and A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow the generation of a plurality of types of winnings including a bonus winning (small role) accompanied by a game value,
Respective derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
When the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at each operation timing with respect to each of a plurality of predetermined operation timings (stop operation positions), the operation is derived to the variable display area. Derivation control table storage means (stop control table stored in ROM 41b) for storing a plurality of predetermined derivation control tables (slip frame number data) so that the display result can be specified;
Select one of a plurality of derivation control tables stored in the derivation control table storage unit according to the determination result of the predetermination unit (corresponding to the stop position of the stopped reel as a result of the internal lottery) Derivation control table selection means for selecting sliding frame number data to be
The pre-determining means is allowed to generate from the display result (stop position according to the number of sliding frames from 0 to 4) that can be derived to the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operating means at the operation timing when the derivation operating means is operated. Then, a display result search means for searching for a winning display result (a stop position where the winning combination is aligned with the winning line) corresponding to the determined winning, and specifying the winning display result,
First derivation control for deriving the display result specified from the derivation control table (control for stopping the stop position specified from the sliding frame number data), or deriving the winning display result specified by the display result search means Derivation control selection means for selecting any one of the second derivation control to be performed (control for stopping the stop position specified from the search result);
When the derivation operation means is operated, a derivation control means (reel stop) that performs control for deriving the display result to the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on the derivation control selected by the derivation control selection means. Control), and
With
The derivation control table selection means is a situation in which it is determined by the pre-decision means that the occurrence of both the special prize and the prize-winning is permitted (when a special role and a small role are won simultaneously, or a special role The same derivation control table as the case where it is determined that the occurrence of only the small part winning is determined (when the small part is won during carryover) (select the sliding frame number data corresponding to the small part) Select
The derivation control selection means includes
In a situation where it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of both the special winning and the winning prize is permitted, the display result specified from the derivation control table is a winning display result corresponding to the winning prize. Yes, if the winning display result corresponding to the special winning is not specified by the display result search means (the stopping position specified from the sliding frame number data is the stopping position where the winning small role stops on the winning line) The first derivation control (control to stop the stop position specified from the sliding frame number data) when the stop position specified from the search result is a stop position at which the winning special combination does not stop on the winning line) )
In a situation where it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of both the special winning and the winning winning is permitted, the display result specified from the derivation control table corresponds to the winning winning display result corresponding only to the winning winning Or a display result that does not correspond to the special prize or the awarded prize, and when the prize display result corresponding to the special prize is specified by the display result search means (the stop position specified from the sliding frame number data is , The stop position where only the selected small role stops on the winning line, or the stop position where neither the selected special role nor the small role stops on the winning line, and the stop position specified from the search result indicates that the selected special role becomes the winning line. Selecting the second derivation control (control to stop the stop position specified from the search result) in the case of a stop position to stop),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the derivation control tables are individually set for the case where it is determined that only the special winning is permitted and the case where it is determined that both the special winning and the award winning are determined. Since it is possible to perform control for deriving display results according to both determination results without preparation, it is possible to diversify the display results of the variable display device and reduce the storage capacity of the derivation control table. In addition, when it is determined that the occurrence of both the special winning and the winning prize is determined, the same display as when the display result when the special winning is missed is determined to allow the generation of only the winning prize. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether or not the special prize is allowed to be generated from the display result, and even when it is determined that only the awarded prize is allowed, the expectation for the special prize will be generated. Can be given.
The derivation control selection means has a display result specified from the derivation control table in a situation where it is determined by the prior determination means that the occurrence of both the special prize and the award prize is permitted. When a display result corresponding to only the special prize is specified by the display result search means, the display result specified from the derivation control table is the prize display result corresponding to the special prize only. If a winning display result corresponding to both of the winning prizes and the winning result display result corresponding to both the special winning and the winning prize is specified by the display result search means, the first derivation control, the second Any of the derivation controls may be selected.
In addition, the derivation control selection unit may display a display result specified from the derivation control table in a situation where the predetermination unit has determined that the occurrence of both the special prize and the award prize is permitted. When a display result corresponding to only the special prize is specified by the display result search means, the display result is displayed in all of the variable display areas. The first derivation control may be selected unless there are special circumstances such as the occurrence of both the special prize and the awarded prize at the stage of derivation or the occurrence of an unacceptable prize. Preferably, it is possible to derive a display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means.

  In addition, in the first and third aspects, the situation in which it is determined by the predetermining means that the occurrence of both the special winning and the prize winning is permitted is, for example, that the predetermining means is the same game. , A decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize and a decision to allow the occurrence of the prize-winning can be performed simultaneously. When the decision to allow the occurrence of a prize and the decision to allow the occurrence of the prize-winning are made at the same time, or the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is determined by the pre-determining means. And a carry-over means for carrying over the decision to the next game when an allowable special prize cannot be generated, and the pre-decision means carries over the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize State The determination of whether or not to allow the generation of the winning award is also performed, and in the state where the determination to allow the generation of the special winning is carried over by the carryover means, the predetermining means performs the awarding of the winning award. This is the case, for example, when a decision is made to allow the occurrence of the problem.

A slot machine according to claim 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 3,
Provided with an effect display device that can be displayed more easily than the variable display area and can display an effect display result based on the display result of the variable display area;
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to determine whether or not a special winning is permitted from the display result of the variable display area when it is determined that both the special winning and the winning winning are permitted. Since it becomes difficult, the player's consciousness can be directed to the effect display result by the effect display device.
The display device for presentation provided more easily than the variable display area is, for example, a display area that is formed larger than the variable display area or a position that is easier to visually recognize than the arrangement position of the variable display area. The display device includes the displayed area.
An effect display device capable of displaying an effect display result based on the display result of the variable display area is an effect display result corresponding to the display result of the variable display area. For example, it is derived at a higher rate than the display result not corresponding to.

A slot machine according to claim 5 of the present invention,
Variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C) capable of deriving and displaying display results in a plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be individually identified 2R),
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number (1, 3) of bets for one game using game values (medals), and display results are derived in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is ended by being displayed, and a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived (when the start switch 7 is detected), a special prize (special role) accompanied by a transition to a special gaming state (big bonus) advantageous to the player, and A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow the generation of a plurality of types of winnings including a bonus winning (small role) accompanied by a game value,
Respective derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
When the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at each operation timing with respect to each of a plurality of predetermined operation timings (stop operation positions), the operation is derived to the variable display area. Derivation control table storage means (stop control table stored in ROM 41b) for storing a plurality of predetermined derivation control tables (slip frame number data) so that the display result can be specified;
Select one of a plurality of derivation control tables stored in the derivation control table storage unit according to the determination result of the predetermination unit (corresponding to the stop position of the stopped reel as a result of the internal lottery) Derivation control table selection means for selecting sliding frame number data to be
The pre-determining means is allowed to generate from the display result (stop position according to the number of sliding frames from 0 to 4) that can be derived to the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operating means at the operation timing when the derivation operating means is operated. Then, a display result search means for searching for a winning display result (a stop position where the winning combination is aligned with the winning line) corresponding to the determined winning, and specifying the winning display result,
First derivation control for deriving the display result specified from the derivation control table (control for stopping the stop position specified from the sliding frame number data), or deriving the winning display result specified by the display result search means Derivation control selection means for selecting any one of the second derivation control to be performed (control for stopping the stop position specified from the search result);
When the derivation operation means is operated, a derivation control means (reel stop) that performs control for deriving the display result to the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on the derivation control selected by the derivation control selection means. Control), and
With
The derivation control table selection means is determined in the situation where it is determined to allow the generation of the first prize by the pre-determining means and in the situation where the generation of the second prize is determined. Select a common derivation control table (select common slip frame number data when winning 1 (1), 1 (2) and bonus),
The derivation control selection means includes
In a situation where it is determined by the pre-determining means that the first winning is permitted (when one (1) or one (2) is won), the display result search means makes the first If the winning display result corresponding to the winning is not specified (when the stop position specified from the search result is a stop position where one (1) and one (2) do not stop on the winning line), Selecting the first derivation control (control for stopping the stop position specified from the sliding frame number data);
Display specified from the derivation control table in a situation where it is determined by the pre-determining means that the first winning is permitted (when one (1) or one (2) is won) When the result is a display result that does not correspond to the first winning and the winning display result corresponding to the first winning is specified by the display result search means (the stop position specified from the sliding frame number data is One (1) and one (2) are stop positions that do not stop on the winning line, and the stop position specified from the search result is one (1) and one (2) stops that stops on the winning line. The second derivation control (control to stop the stop position specified from the search result)
In a situation where it is determined by the pre-determining means that the second winning is allowed (when a special role is won), a winning display result corresponding to the second winning is displayed by the display result searching means. When not specified (when the stop position specified from the search result is a stop position at which the special role does not stop on the winning line), the first derivation control (the stop position specified from the slip frame number data) is set. Control to stop)
The display result specified from the derivation control table corresponds to the second winning in the situation where it is determined by the pre-determining means that the second winning is allowed (when the special role is won). If the winning display result corresponding to the second winning is specified by the display result searching means (the stop position specified from the sliding frame number data is the stop where the special role does not stop on the winning line) The second derivation control (control to stop the stop position specified from the search result) when the special position is the stop position at which the special role stops at the winning line). Select
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the common derivation control table is used both when it is determined that the first winning is permitted and when it is determined that the second winning is permitted. In addition, since it is possible to perform control for deriving different display results according to the determination result of the predetermining means, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the derivation control table while diversifying the display results of the variable display device.
The derivation control selection means has a display result specified from the derivation control table in the situation where it is determined by the prior determination means that the first winning is permitted. If the display result search means specifies the winning display result corresponding to the first winning, the predetermining means may allow the second winning to be generated. In the determined situation, the display result specified from the derivation control table is a winning display result corresponding to the second winning, and the winning display result corresponding to the second winning is displayed by the display result search means. When specified, either the first derivation control or the second derivation control may be selected.
In addition, the derivation control table selection unit may determine from the derivation control table that the predetermination unit determines that the first winning and the second winning are permitted. The specified display result is a winning display result corresponding to both the first winning and the second winning, and the winning display result corresponding to only the first winning or the second winning by the display result searching means. When the winning display result corresponding to only the winning is selected, the first derivation control is selected, and the display result specified from the derivation control table is one of the first winning or the second winning. If the winning display result corresponding to both the first winning and the second winning is specified by the display result search means, the winning display result is specified from the derivation control table. The display result is a display result that does not correspond to the first prize or the second prize, and the display result search means corresponds to at least one of the first prize or the second prize. In this case, the second derivation control may be selected.

In claims 1, 3, and 5, the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and when the bet number of two or more is set or the maximum bet number is set, the game is played. It may be possible to start. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
In addition, for each of a plurality of predetermined operation timings in claims 1, 3 and 5, a display result derived to the variable display area is specified when the derivation operation means is operated at each operation timing. Predetermined derivation control table so that it can be used to specify the amount of symbol movement (so-called number of sliding symbols) from when the derivation operation means is operated until the display result is derived, and the derived display result Possible identification numbers, etc., are registered at each operation timing, and display results derived in the variable display area at each operation timing by determining the derivable deriving positions among a plurality of predetermined deriving positions Is data that can be specified. Further, the data may be compressed data so that the data can be expanded by a predetermined algorithm.
Further, the display result search means according to claim 1, 3 or 5, wherein the prior determination means is based on a display result that can be derived to a variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means at an operation timing when the derivation operation means is operated. The winning display result corresponding to the winning determined to be allowed to be searched is searched and the winning display result is specified. The winning display result corresponding to the winning determined to be allowed to be generated by the pre-determining means among the derivable display results. In the case where there are a plurality of items, all of them may be specified, or any one of them may be specified. The derivation control may be selected by comparing the specified display result with a plurality of winning display results specified by the display result search means in a predetermined order.

A slot machine according to claim 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
A data storage means (RAM 41c) having a storage area for storing data for controlling the game in a readable and writable manner;
Plural types having different ratios (winning probabilities) for determining whether or not to allow a winning to be generated by the predetermining means (internal lottery) based on an operation of a predetermined setting operating means (reset / setting switch 36) An allowable stage selection means (setting change process by the CPU 41a) for selecting one of the allowable stages from the allowable stages (setting values) of
Permissible step setting means (CPU 41a is a setting change process) that sets data indicating the permissible step selected by the permissible step selection means in the permissible step storage area (set value work 1) assigned to the storage area of the data storage means. The set value determined in step 1 is stored in the set value work 1),
Permissible stage data judging means for judging whether or not the data indicating the permissible stage stored in the permissible stage storage area for each game is appropriate data indicating the permissible stage that can be selected by the permissible stage selecting means ( Set value determination processing 1) by the CPU 41a;
Disabling means (error processing by the CPU 41a) for disabling the progress of the game when the allowable stage data determination means determines that the data indicating the allowable stage stored in the allowable stage storage area is not appropriate data. )When,
After the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the disabling of the progress of the game is canceled on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means, and the progress of the game Disabling cancellation means (transition to game processing by the CPU 41a),
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is determined for each game whether or not the data indicating the allowable level that determines the rate at which the winning is allowed is appropriate, and if it is determined that the data indicating the allowable level is not appropriate. Game progress is disabled. That is, if the data indicating the allowable level is not appropriate data indicating the allowable level that can be selected by the allowable level selection means, the data indicating the allowable level may be illegally rewritten. Is disabled. The state where the progress of the game is disabled is canceled by newly selecting and setting an allowable stage (setting value) based on the operation of the setting operation means. For this reason, in order to resume the game when there is a possibility that the data indicating the allowable level has been illegally rewritten, the operation of changing the allowable level is more time-consuming than the reset operation for canceling the normal error. Since it is necessary, such fraud can be effectively prevented.
Also, if there is a possibility that the data indicating the allowable stage has been illegally rewritten, the allowable stage selected and set based on the operation of the setting operation means, not the allowable stage automatically set by the slot machine Since the game is played based on (generally, the operation of the setting operation means is operated by an employee of the game shop, which is an allowable stage selected by the game shop side), the game is fair. be able to.
Note that the permissible stage data determination means is configured to store the data at least once at any timing of one game (for example, at the start or end of the game, or at the time of execution of a process that is always executed for each game). What is necessary is just to determine whether or not the data indicating the allowable level stored in the storage means is appropriate data indicating the allowable level that can be selected by the allowable level selecting means.
Further, the permissible stage data determination means determines whether or not the data indicating the permissible stage stored in the data storage means for each game is appropriate data indicating the permissible stage that can be selected by the permissible stage selection means. Although the determination is made, the data is stored when the permissible stage data determination means does not execute every game but a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, every predetermined number of games, a game excluding a special game state advantageous to the player). It may be determined whether the data indicating the allowable level stored in the means is appropriate data indicating the allowable level selectable by the allowable level selecting means. The same effect as that of the invention of item 6 can be obtained.

A slot machine according to a seventh aspect of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects,
A data storage means (RAM 41c) having a storage area for storing data for controlling the game in a readable and writable manner;
Plural types having different ratios (winning probabilities) for determining whether or not to allow a winning to be generated by the predetermining means (internal lottery) based on an operation of a predetermined setting operating means (reset / setting switch 36) An allowable stage selection means (setting change process by the CPU 41a) for selecting one of the allowable stages from the allowable stages (setting values) of
Permissible step setting means (CPU 41a is a setting change process) that sets data indicating the permissible step selected by the permissible step selection means in the permissible step storage area (set value work 1) assigned to the storage area of the data storage means. The set value determined in step 1 is stored in the set value work 1),
Storage data determination means (determination of RAM parity and determination of destruction diagnosis data by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not the data stored in the data storage means is normal;
Disabling means for disabling the progress of the game when the stored data determining means determines that the data stored in the data storing means is not normal (when the CPU 41a determines that the RAM data is abnormal) RAM error error state)
In a state where the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the progress of the game is performed on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means based on the operation of the setting operation means. The disabling canceling means for canceling the disabled state and allowing the game to proceed (when the CPU 41a shifts to the RAM abnormal error state, the setting value is newly selected and set by the setting changing process, so that the game Return to processing)
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the data storage means, the progress of the game is disabled, and an allowable stage (set value) is newly set based on the operation of the setting operation means. If the game is not selected or set, the state where the progress of the game is disabled is not released. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the data storage means, it is not an allowable stage automatically set by the slot machine, but an allowable stage selected and set based on the operation of the setting operation means (general In addition, since the operation of the setting operation means is operated by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is played based on the permissible stage selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game should be ensured Can do.

A slot machine according to claim 8 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The variable display device fluctuates by rotating display bands (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each having a plurality of types of identifiable symbols by driving a stepping motor (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R). A display device for deriving and displaying a display result in each of the plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) that can be displayed;
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has not yet been derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas, a derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is provided for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived. From the plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived for the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time of operation (area number assigned for each number of steps for one symbol) The control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the means is uniquely selected (when all reels are rotating and the internal lottery result is the same and when the stop operation position is the same, the same display result is always obtained. Including a control pattern selection means for selecting a stop control method to be
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Control is performed to derive a display result uniquely specified for the number of steps as the display result of the variable display area (when all reels are rotating and the results of the internal lottery are the same and stop) When the operation position is the same, the reel that has been stopped by the stop control method that always gives the same display result is stopped)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the step of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived in the situation where the display result has not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas. A control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the pre-decision means is uniquely selected from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived for the number, and the display result is derived to the corresponding variable display area. Control is performed. That is, only one control pattern is applied to the determination result of one pre-determining means, and it is not necessary to select any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns, and the display result of the variable display device is derived. It does not complicate the control when making it.
Incidentally, to uniquely select the control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination unit is to always select the same control pattern when the determination result of the prior determination unit is the same, This does not prevent the selection of a common control pattern when the determination results of the prior determination means are different.

A slot machine according to claim 9 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
The variable display device fluctuates by rotating display bands (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each having a plurality of types of identifiable symbols by driving a stepping motor (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R). A display device for deriving and displaying a display result in each of the plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) that can be displayed;
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. For the variable display area, from the plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived for the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated, A control pattern corresponding to the combination of the determination result of the determining means and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is uniquely selected (any one reel has already stopped and the remaining reels are rotating). Yes, if the result of the internal lottery is the same for both stopped reels and if the stop operation position is the same, That includes a selection for) control pattern selecting means for stopping control method,
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated The display result uniquely specified from the number of steps is derived as the display result of the variable display area (any one reel is already stopped and the remaining reels are rotating, and the result of the internal lottery) When the display results of the stopped reels are the same, and the stop operation position is the same, the reels that have been stopped by the stop control method that always gives the same display results are stopped)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the situation where the display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and the display result has not yet been derived in the other variable display areas, the display result has not yet been derived. The determination result of the predetermining means from the plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated for the variable display area where the derivation operation means is operated In addition, a control pattern corresponding to the combination of display results of the variable display area for which the display result has already been derived is uniquely selected, and control for deriving the display result to the corresponding variable display area is performed. That is, there is only one control pattern applied to one display result in the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived as a result of determination by one prior determination means, and any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns Need not be further selected, and the control for deriving the display result of the variable display device is not complicated.
Note that when the control pattern corresponding to the combination of the determination result of the prior determination unit and the display result of the variable display area for which the display result has already been derived is uniquely selected, the determination result of the prior determination unit is the same. If the display result of the variable display area for which the display result has already been derived is the same, the same control pattern is always selected. If the determination result of the predetermining means is different, or the display result has already been derived. This does not prevent the selection of a common control pattern when the display results of the variable display areas are different.

  In addition, the control pattern for uniquely specifying the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated in claims 8 and 9 means that the derivation operation means is operated. This is a control pattern that always specifies the same display result as the derived display result when the number of steps at the same time is the same.

A slot machine according to claim 10 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
Numerical data updated within a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing before determination by the prior determination means (when the start switch 7 is detected) is determined for each game as numerical data for determination (internal Numeric data input means (random number acquisition processing by the CPU 41a) for inputting into the determination area as a random number for lottery),
A range that is determined so that the range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow for the occurrence of the numerical value data for determination input to the determination region can be specified for the winning Range specifying data storage means for storing specific data (number of determination values) (storage area for role-specific table and determination value number in ROM 41b);
With
The range specifying data storage means includes, as the range specifying data, a special prize (special role) accompanied by a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to a player and a normal prize (small role, re-playing role) other than the special prize. Overlapping range specification data (number of judgment values for which winning of both a small role or a re-playing role and a special role is judged) that can specify a range of judgment values that will determine that both occurrences are allowed simultaneously Remember,
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit includes the determination numerical data input to the determination region. Including a winning allowance determining means for determining whether or not the generation of a prize is permitted, and determining that the generation of a winning determined to be permitted by the permission determining means is permitted. (If the value obtained by adding the random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values overflows, that combination or combination of combinations is won)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the determination numerical data input to the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the overlapping range specifying data, both the special winning and the normal winning are generated by the predetermining means. Is determined to be permitted at the same time, and therefore, when a normal winning occurs as a result of the game, it can be expected that a special winning is permitted. In addition, since the special winning and the normal winning can be determined by one allowance determining unit, the processing by the pre-determining unit can be simplified.
The range specifying data storage means, as the range specifying data, single range specifying data that can specify the range of the determination value that determines that the occurrence of only the special prize is allowed, and the special winning and It is also possible to store overlapping range specifying data that can specify a range of determination values that will determine that both occurrences of the normal winning are allowed at the same time. In this way, the result of the game Even if no normal winnings occur, it is not denied that special winnings are allowed, so the player's expectation that special winnings are allowed is maintained even in this situation. Can be made.
Further, the range specifying data storage means, as the range specifying data, single range specifying data capable of specifying a range of determination values that will determine that the occurrence of only the normal winning is permitted, the special winning and It is also possible to store overlapping range specifying data that can specify a range of determination values that will determine that both occurrences of the normal winning are allowed at the same time. In this way, the result of the game Even if no normal winnings occur, it is not denied that special winnings are allowed, so the player's expectation that special winnings are allowed is maintained even in this situation. Can be made.

A slot machine according to an eleventh aspect of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of the first to ninth aspects,
Numerical data updated within a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing before determination by the prior determination means (when the start switch 7 is detected) is determined for each game as numerical data for determination (internal Numeric data input means (random number acquisition processing by the CPU 41a) for inputting into the determination area as a random number for lottery),
For the special prize (special role) accompanied by the transition to the special gaming state advantageous for the player, it is determined that the predetermination means allows the generation of the numerical data for determination input in the determination area. Special winning range specifying data storage means for storing range specifying data (the number of determination values for special roles) determined so that the range of determination values to be specified can be specified (special role-specific table and special function in ROM 41b) Storage area for the number of judgment values for the role)
A determination value that determines that the pre-determining means allows the generation of the numerical value data for determination input in the determination area for a normal winning (other than the special winning) (small role, replaying combination) Normal winning range specifying data storage means for storing range specifying data (the number of judgment values of the small combination and re-playing combination) determined so that the range can be specified (the combination for the small combination and re-playing combination in the ROM 41b) A separate table and a storage area for the number of judgment values of a small combination and a re-playing combination), and
With
The range of determination values that the predetermining means determines to allow the occurrence of the special prize is a determination value that determines that the predetermining means permits the occurrence of the normal prize Including a range of judgment values that overlaps with the range of judgment values (a range of judgment values in which a small role or a replaying role and a special role are selected and won)
The pre-determining means includes
The occurrence of the normal winning is determined depending on whether or not the range of determination values specified by the range specifying data stored in the normal winning range specifying data storage means includes the determination numerical data input to the determination area. A normal winning allowance judging means (lottery process for judging winning of a small role and a re-playing role) for judging whether or not to indicate that it is allowed;
Whether or not the same range of determination value data as used by the normal winning allowance determining unit is included in the range of determination values specified by the range specifying data stored in the special winning range specifying data storage unit Special winning allowance determining means for determining whether or not the occurrence of the special winning is permitted (a lottery process for determining the winning of a special role);
Including
The pre-determining means is
A determination is made as to whether or not the occurrence of a winning is permitted by both the normal winning allowance determining means and the special winning allowance determining means,
When it is determined that both the normal winning allowance determining means and the special winning allowance determining means indicate that the winning is permitted, it is determined that both the normal winning and the special winning are permitted ( If the winning combination is determined by both the lottery process for determining the winning of the small role and the re-playing role and the lottery process for determining the winning of the special role, the small role or the re-playing role and the special role determined as winning And both are elected)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the determination numerical data input to the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the overlapping range specifying data, both the special winning and the normal winning are generated by the predetermining means. Is determined to be permitted at the same time, and therefore, when a normal winning occurs as a result of the game, it can be expected that a special winning is permitted.
It should be noted that the range of the judgment value that determines that the advance determination means allows the occurrence of the special prize is determined that the advance determination means permits the occurrence of the normal prize. Including a range of determination values that does not overlap with a range of determination values, and the pre-determining unit determines that only the special winning allowance determining unit indicates that the occurrence of a winning is permitted, Both the normal winning and the special winning are determined when it is determined that both the normal winning allowance determining means and the special winning allowance determining means indicate that the occurrence of the winning is permitted. It may be determined that the occurrence is allowed. In this way, even if a normal winning is not generated as a result of the game, it is not denied that the occurrence of a special winning is permitted. like It is possible to maintain the player's expectation also for the generation of special pay are allowed in the situation.
In addition, the range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow the occurrence of the normal winning is determined that the pre-determining means allows the special winning to occur. Including a range of determination values that does not overlap with a range of determination values, and the prior determination means generates the normal only when it is determined that only the normal winning allowance determination means indicates that a winning is allowed In the case where it is determined that both the normal winning allowance determining means and the special winning allowance determining means indicate that the winning is permitted, both the normal winning and the special winning are generated. In this way, even if a normal winning does not occur as a result of the game, it is not denied that a special winning is allowed. State It is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the generation of special pay are allowed even.

  In claims 10 and 11, the range specifying data determined so that the range of the determination value can be specified may be the data itself indicating the range of the determination value, or the determination value of each winning prize The total number of determination values may be stored, and the range of determination values may be specified from the total number of determination values and the determination value of each winning prize. Also, the judgment value other than the winning prize determined last and the total number of judgment values are stored, and the remaining judgment value range excluding the judgment value other than the winning prize determined last from the total judgment value is finally determined. It may be one that can be specified as a range of determination values for winning.

A slot machine according to claim 12 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
In a special game (regular bonus) in which a special prize (small bonus) accompanying the provision of the gaming value in the special gaming state is generated with a higher probability than the normal game, the game reaches a predetermined period (12 games or is awarded eight times). Special game control means for controlling (game completion processing by the CPU 41a),
Special game determining means for determining whether or not the special game is controlled in the special gaming state (determining whether or not the big bonus is in progress and the regular bonus is activated);
With
The special game determination means determines whether or not the special game is controlled by the special game for each game in the special gaming state (determines whether or not the regular bonus is operating in the big bonus for each game. ),
The special game control means starts control of the special game when it is determined by the special game determination means that the special game is not controlled (when the regular bonus is not activated in the big bonus) , Start regular bonus)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, while being controlled to the special gaming state, it is determined whether or not the game is controlled by the special game for each game. If not controlled by the special game, the control of the special game is started. The game value can be increased fastest in the special gaming state, so that the player's interest in the transition to the special gaming state can be enhanced rather than the control of the special game being started with some winning as in the past. Can be increased.
Further, since it is determined whether or not each game is controlled by a special game, the control program for each game in the special game state can be shared, so that the program capacity can be reduced.
The special game control means may start control of the special game simultaneously with the start of the special game state. In this case, while the special game state is being controlled, the special game is controlled. Therefore, the control associated with the transition to the special gaming state can be simplified.
Further, the special game determination means determines whether or not the special game is controlled at the end of each game, recognizes the game in which the special winning has occurred as a special gaming state, and generates the special winning. Even in such a game, it may be determined whether or not the game is controlled by the special game. Even in this case, it is only necessary to control the special game while the game is controlled to the special game state. The control associated with the transition to the special gaming state can be simplified.
In addition, the special game determination means may determine whether or not the special game is generated, without recognizing the game in which the special prize has occurred as a special game state, and at the start of each game. Even in this case, it is only necessary to control the special game while the special game state is being controlled, so that the control accompanying the transition to the special game state can be simplified.

A slot machine according to claim 13 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
Special gaming state transition means for transitioning to a special gaming state (big bonus) when a special prize (special role) accompanied by transition of the gaming state occurs in a normal game;
In a special game (regular bonus) in which a special prize (small bonus) accompanying the provision of the gaming value in the special gaming state is generated with a higher probability than the normal game, the game reaches a predetermined period (12 games or is awarded eight times). Special game control means for controlling (game completion processing by the CPU 41a),
With
The special game control means resumes the control of the special game when the predetermined period expires after the control of the special game starts and the control of the special game ends (a regular bonus in a big bonus) If the big bonus continues at the end, resume the regular bonus)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control of the special game is finished while the special game state is controlled, the special game is resumed, so that the gaming value can be increased fastest in the special game state. Therefore, the interest of the player associated with the transition to the special game state can be enhanced rather than the control of the special game being started with some winning as in the prior art.
Further, since the process for re-activating the special game is performed only when the control of the special game is finished, unnecessary processing is not performed in a state where the control of the special game is not finished.
The special game control means may start control of the special game simultaneously with the start of the special game state. In this case, while the special game state is being controlled, the special game is controlled. Therefore, the control associated with the transition to the special gaming state can be simplified.

  In the twelfth and thirteenth aspects of the present invention, the period during which the special game control means controls the special game starts when the special game is started. The game may be controlled until a special game is reached, or after the special game has started, a special game end condition (for example, a specified number of times (even once) may be set) It may be good or may be a plurality of times), and the game may be controlled to a special game until the occurrence of a prize is established. Furthermore, even if a special game is reached until a predetermined number of games is reached after a special game starts or a predetermined special game end condition is met, the special game is controlled. good.

A slot machine according to a fourteenth aspect of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of the first to thirteenth aspects,
Based on the determination result of the pre-determining means, abnormal winning determination data (allowed) that can specify whether or not the occurrence of the winning is allowed in the game for each bit assigned for each type of winning. An abnormal winning determination data setting means for setting an abnormal winning determination flag that sets the value of the bit assigned to a winning combination to 0 and the value of the bit assigned to an unacceptable winning combination to 1 (all winning flags are set) Conversion to abnormal winning determination flag by bit inversion), and
After the display result is derived for all of the variable display areas, the winning result data that can specify whether or not the winning has occurred for each bit assigned for each type of winning based on the derived display result Winning result data setting means for setting (a winning symbol flag in which the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination is 1 and the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination is 0) (after all reels are stopped) Processing to create a winning symbol flag from the stop symbol),
Calculation means for calculating the value of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means (Logical AND operation of abnormal winning determination flag and winning symbol flag),
Abnormal winning determination means for determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning based on the value of each bit calculated by the calculating means (determines whether the result of the logical product operation is 0 or not, that is, other than 0) Processing for determining an abnormal prize when there is at least one value of)
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning, the value of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned is calculated in the abnormal winning determination data and the winning result data, and the result is determined. It is possible to determine whether or not it is an abnormal winning, and it is not necessary to specify the bit of the winning flag of the winning prize that has been established as in the past and check the value of the specified bit. It is also possible to simplify the process when determining whether or not the prize is abnormal.

A slot machine according to claim 15 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
A game value storage means (a credit counter assigned to the RAM 41c) for storing a game value (credit) owned by the player;
A bet number setting means for setting a bet number using at least the game value stored in the game value storage means (the CPU 41a subtracts the credit counter by detecting the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6) And setting control of the number of bets to which the BET counter is added)
Return control means (the CPU 41a is used for the return switch 19 to return the game value stored in the game value storage means in response to an operation of a predetermined game value return operation section (the checkout switch 10). The payment control for paying out the credit counter medals by detection)
Value grant processing means (CPU 41a is a small role) that performs a value grant process for assigning a predetermined number of game values according to the type of the prize to be awarded when a prize is awarded with the addition of the game value. Add the number of medals according to the type of small role to the credit counter at the time of winning, and pay out the medals exceeding the upper limit of the credit counter)
Special game state transition means (the CPU 41a makes a big bonus when winning a big bonus when a special prize (special role) accompanied by a transition of the game state occurs in the normal game (normal game state). Control to shift to)
A bet number setting prohibiting unit (the CPU 41a sets prohibition of inserting medals by setting at the start of the game and prohibits setting of a bet number by the bet number setting unit when the game starts. , Disable detection of the MAXBET switch 6),
Return control prohibiting means for prohibiting return control by the gaming value return means when the game is started (the CPU 41a invalidates the detection of the settlement switch 10 by the setting at the start of the game);
After a display result is derived for all of the variable display areas, when a combination other than the combination of the winning display results corresponding to the winning prize is derived, the game results when the display results are derived for all of the variable display areas. When a combination of winning display results corresponding to the winning prize is derived after determining the end, a game end judging means (CPU 41a) for judging the end of the game when the value giving process accompanying the occurrence of the winning prize is finished. In the case of a game that has not been awarded with a medal payout due to the end of the game, the game is judged to end when all reels are stopped, and in a game that has received a medal payout, the medal is paid out. (Determine the end of the game at the end of (credit addition)),
On the condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game, bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling prohibition of setting of the bet number by the betting number setting prohibiting means (cancellation of prohibition of medal insertion by the CPU 41a, 1 Sheet BET switch 5, detection of MAXBET switch 6),
Return control prohibition release means (validation of detection of the settlement switch 10 by the CPU 41a) for canceling prohibition of return control by the return control prohibition means on condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game;
In the game in which the special winning has occurred, the special winning has occurred in a period from when the game end determining means determines the end of the game until a predetermined time (the production waiting time for the production at the BB winning) elapses. A special prize production execution means for executing a special prize production effect (production at the time of a BB prize) indicating that the BB prize is produced at the time of a big bonus prize,
With
The bet number setting prohibition canceling unit is configured to release the game when the special winning has occurred when a predetermined time (the production waiting time for the BB winning effect) elapses after the game end determining unit determines the end of the game. The bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling the setting of the betting number by the betting number setting prohibiting means (the CPU 41a cancels the inability to insert medals at the beginning of the BET process of the next game, Enable detection of MAXBET switch 6),
The return control prohibition canceling means is a special prize return control for canceling the prohibition of the return control by the return control prohibiting means when the game end determining means determines the end of the game in the game in which the special winning has occurred. Including prohibition canceling means (the CPU 41a enables the detection of the settlement switch 10 before the BB winning stage effect waiting process),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in a game in which a special winning has occurred, the prohibition of return control is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and setting of the bet number is prohibited until a predetermined time has elapsed after the game ends. Even during the period, that is, the period during which a special prize effect such as a fanfare is being performed, it is possible to return the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage means. As a result, the game value stored as owned by the player can be returned. Thereby, for example, in a game in which a special winning has occurred, before starting a game in a special gaming state accompanying the occurrence of the special winning, a part of the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage means is given as a prize (for example, It may be desired to exchange for soft drinks, cigarettes, etc.), but it is possible to receive a return of gaming value reflecting such a player's will.
The special winning bet number setting prohibition canceling means determines that the game end determination is made only in a game in which a specific type of special winning out of the plurality of types of special winnings occurs when there are a plurality of types of special winnings. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the means determined the end of the game, the bet number setting prohibition by the bet number setting prohibiting means is released, and in a game where a special prize other than the specific type has occurred, When the game end determination means determines the end of the game, the bet number setting prohibition by the bet number setting prohibition means can be canceled.

A slot machine according to claim 16 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 15,
A game value storage means (a credit counter assigned to the RAM 41c) for storing a game value (credit) owned by the player;
A bet number setting means for setting a bet number using at least the game value stored in the game value storage means (the CPU 41a subtracts the credit counter by detecting the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6) And setting control of the number of bets to which the BET counter is added)
Return control means (the CPU 41a is used for the return switch 19 to return the game value stored in the game value storage means in response to an operation of a predetermined game value return operation section (the checkout switch 10). The payment control for paying out the credit counter medals by detection)
Value grant processing means (CPU 41a is a small role) that performs a value grant process for assigning a predetermined number of game values according to the type of the prize to be awarded when a prize is awarded with the addition of the game value. Add the number of medals according to the type of small role to the credit counter at the time of winning, and pay out the medals exceeding the upper limit of the credit counter)
Special game state transition means (the CPU 41a makes a big bonus when winning a big bonus when a special prize (special role) accompanied by a transition of the game state occurs in the normal game (normal game state). Control to shift to)
Special game state end condition determination for determining whether a predetermined special game state end condition (the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds 465) in the special game state (big bonus) is satisfied Means (the CPU 41a determines whether or not the total number of payouts exceeds 465 for each game in the big bonus);
When the special game state end condition determining means determines that the end condition is satisfied, the special game state end means for terminating the special game state (the CPU 41a determines that the total number of paid-out medals in the big bonus is 465. Control to end the big bonus when it exceeds)
A bet number setting prohibiting unit (the CPU 41a sets prohibition of inserting medals by setting at the start of the game and prohibits setting of a bet number by the bet number setting unit when the game starts. , Disable detection of the MAXBET switch 6),
Return control prohibiting means for prohibiting return control by the gaming value return means when the game is started (the CPU 41a invalidates the detection of the settlement switch 10 by the setting at the start of the game);
After a display result is derived for all of the variable display areas, when a combination other than the combination of the winning display results corresponding to the winning prize is derived, the game results when the display results are derived for all of the variable display areas. When a combination of winning display results corresponding to the winning prize is derived after determining the end, a game end judging means (CPU 41a) for judging the end of the game when the value giving process accompanying the occurrence of the winning prize is finished. In the case of a game that has not been awarded with a medal payout due to the end of the game, the game is judged to end when all reels are stopped, and in a game that has received a medal payout, the medal is paid out. (Determine the end of the game at the end of (credit addition)),
On the condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game, bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling prohibition of setting of the bet number by the betting number setting prohibiting means (cancellation of prohibition of medal insertion by the CPU 41a, 1 Sheet BET switch 5, detection of MAXBET switch 6),
Return control prohibition release means (validation of detection of the settlement switch 10 by the CPU 41a) for canceling prohibition of return control by the return control prohibition means on condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game;
In a game in which the end condition is determined to be satisfied by the special game state end condition determining unit, a predetermined time (end waiting time for the ending effect) is determined after the game end determining unit determines the end of the game. End effect execution means for executing an end effect (ending effect) indicating that the special gaming state has ended during the period until the elapsed (CPU 91 executes the ending effect at the end of the big bonus);
With
The bet number setting prohibition canceling means is a predetermined time after the game end determining means determines the end of the game in the game in which the end condition is determined to be satisfied by the special gaming state end condition determining means. Ending bet number setting prohibition canceling means (the CPU 41a cancels the bet number setting prohibition by the bet number setting prohibiting means when the ending effect effect waiting time has elapsed). And the detection of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 are enabled)
The return control prohibition canceling means is the return control prohibition means when the game end determination means determines the end of the game in the game in which the end condition is determined to be satisfied by the special gaming state end condition determination means. An end-time return control prohibition canceling means for canceling the prohibition of the return control by (the CPU 41a activates the detection of the settlement switch 10 before the waiting process for the ending effect),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the game in which the end condition in the special gaming state is satisfied, the return control prohibition is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and the number of bets until a predetermined time elapses after the game ends. Since it is possible to return the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage means even during the period in which the setting is prohibited, that is, the period in which the ending effect such as the ending effect is being performed, Reflecting the player's will as much as possible, the game value stored as owned by the player can be returned. Thereby, in particular, it is possible to receive the return of the game value reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the special game state.
The end-time bet number setting prohibition canceling means, when there are a plurality of special game states, only in a game in which a specific type of special game state end condition is satisfied among the plurality of types of special game states. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the game end determination means determined the end of the game, the bet number setting prohibition by the bet number setting prohibition means is canceled and a special game state other than the specific type is released. In a game in which the end condition is satisfied, the bet number setting prohibition by the bet number setting prohibiting unit can be canceled when the game end determination unit determines the end of the game.

A slot machine according to claim 17 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 16,
A game value storage means (a credit counter assigned to the RAM 41c) for storing a game value (credit) owned by the player;
A bet number setting means for setting a bet number using at least the game value stored in the game value storage means (the CPU 41a subtracts the credit counter by detecting the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6) And setting control of the number of bets to which the BET counter is added)
Return control means (the CPU 41a is used for the return switch 19 to return the game value stored in the game value storage means in response to an operation of a predetermined game value return operation section (the checkout switch 10). The payment control for paying out the credit counter medals by detection)
Value grant processing means (CPU 41a is a small role) that performs a value grant process for assigning a predetermined number of game values according to the type of the prize to be awarded when a prize is awarded with the addition of the game value. Add the number of medals according to the type of small role to the credit counter at the time of winning, and pay out the medals exceeding the upper limit of the credit counter)
Special game state transition means (the CPU 41a makes a big bonus when winning a big bonus when a special prize (special role) accompanied by a transition of the game state occurs in the normal game (normal game state). Control to shift to)
Special game state end condition determination for determining whether a predetermined special game state end condition (the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds 465) in the special game state (big bonus) is satisfied Means (the CPU 41a determines whether or not the total number of payouts exceeds 465 for each game in the big bonus);
When the special game state end condition determining means determines that the end condition is satisfied, the special game state end means for terminating the special game state (the CPU 41a determines that the total number of paid-out medals in the big bonus is 465. Control to end the big bonus when it exceeds)
A bet number setting prohibiting unit (the CPU 41a sets prohibition of inserting medals by setting at the start of the game and prohibits setting of a bet number by the bet number setting unit when the game starts. , Disable detection of the MAXBET switch 6),
Return control prohibiting means for prohibiting return control by the gaming value return means when the game is started (the CPU 41a invalidates the detection of the settlement switch 10 by the setting at the start of the game);
After a display result is derived for all of the variable display areas, when a combination other than the combination of the winning display results corresponding to the winning prize is derived, the game results when the display results are derived for all of the variable display areas. When a combination of winning display results corresponding to the winning prize is derived after determining the end, a game end judging means (CPU 41a) for judging the end of the game when the value giving process accompanying the occurrence of the winning prize is finished. In the case of a game that has not been awarded with a medal payout due to the end of the game, the game is judged to end when all reels are stopped, and in a game that has received a medal payout, the medal is paid out. (Determine the end of the game at the end of (credit addition)),
On the condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game, bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling prohibition of setting of the bet number by the betting number setting prohibiting means (cancellation of prohibition of medal insertion by the CPU 41a, 1 Sheet BET switch 5, detection of MAXBET switch 6),
Return control prohibition release means (validation of detection of the settlement switch 10 by the CPU 41a) for canceling prohibition of return control by the return control prohibition means on condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game;
With
The bet number setting prohibition canceling means is a predetermined release operation (in a game in which the end condition is determined to be satisfied by the special gaming state end condition determining means after the game end determining means determines the end of the game). The betting number setting prohibiting means for stopping when the betting number setting prohibiting means by the betting number setting prohibiting means is canceled when the reset operation is performed (the CPU 41a controls the betting state after the end of the big bonus to stop When the reset operation is detected in the state, the process shifts to the next game, and at the beginning of the BET process of the next game, the inability to insert medals is canceled and the detection of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 is enabled). Including
The return control prohibition canceling means is the return control prohibition means when the game end determination means determines the end of the game in the game in which the end condition is determined to be satisfied by the special gaming state end condition determination means. Including a return control prohibition canceling means for canceling return control prohibition by the CPU 41a (the CPU 41a enables detection of the settlement switch 10 before controlling the stop state),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the game in which the end condition in the special gaming state is satisfied, the prohibition of the return control is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and a predetermined release operation such as a reset operation by a store clerk is performed after the game ends. It is possible to return the game value stored in the game value storage means without waiting for the release operation even during a period in which the setting of the bet number is prohibited until it is made (so-called stop state) Therefore, it is possible to receive a return of the game value stored as belonging to the player, reflecting the player's will as much as possible. Thereby, in particular, it is possible to receive the return of the game value reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the special game state.
It should be noted that, when there is a plurality of special game states, the betting number setting prohibition canceling means at the time of stopping is only in a game in which a termination condition for a specific type of special game state among these multiple types of special game states is satisfied. After the game end determination means determines the end of the game, the bet number setting prohibition by the bet number setting prohibition means is canceled when a predetermined release operation (reset operation) is performed, In a game in which a special game state end condition is satisfied, the bet number setting prohibition by the bet number setting prohibiting unit can be canceled when the game end determination unit determines the end of the game.

Note that the betting number setting prohibiting means in claims 15 to 17 is configured such that, for example, even if a gaming medium used for setting the betting number is inserted, the gaming medium is returned or stored in the gaming value storage means. The setting of the bet number may be prohibited by invalidating the operation of the bet number setting operation means that is operated when the game value used is set for setting the bet number.
In addition, in claims 15 to 17, the return control prohibiting unit may prohibit the return control by invalidating the operation of the gaming value return operating unit, for example.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. (A) is a figure showing a winning combination table. (B) is a figure which shows the classification table. It is a figure which shows the memory area of the number of judgment values acquired based on the address registered into the table according to role. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the stop control applied by the stop time as a result of an internal lottery. It is a figure which shows the structure of the table index stored in ROM. It is a figure which shows the procedure of the stop control by a table system. It is a figure which shows the procedure of the stop control by a control system. It is a figure which shows the procedure of the stop control by a table + control system. (A) is a figure which shows the comparison order of the priority of the stop position according to the number of sliding frames, (b) is a figure which shows the relationship of the priority of a stop position. It is a figure which shows the structure of a virtual slide top table. It is a figure which shows an example of sliding frame | number data. It is a figure which shows an example of the update condition of the virtual sliding top table at the time of performing stop control by a table + control system. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of an abnormal winning determination process, and the storing condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM, and RAM. It is a figure which shows an example of the external output signal output from a slot machine. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of BB signal and RB signal among external output signals. It is a timing chart which shows the period when the setting of a bet number is permitted, and the period when adjustment of credit is permitted. It is a timing chart which shows the period when the setting of a bet number is permitted, and the period when adjustment of credit is permitted. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which CPU of a main control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process performed when CPU of a main control part generate | occur | produces an error. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which CPU of a main control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which CPU of a main control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the adjustment process which CPU of a main control part performs in BET processing etc. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in an internal lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process 1 which CPU of a main control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process 2 which CPU of a main control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process 3 which CPU of a main control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the sliding frame number setting process which CPU of a main control part performs in a reel rotation process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the sliding frame number update process which CPU of a main control part performs in a sliding frame number setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop position search process which CPU of a main control part performs in a sliding frame number setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of winning which CPU of a main control part performs in a winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the production waiting process which CPU of the main control part performs in the process at the time of a game end. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop switch process which CPU of a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process performed when CPU of a main control part inputs a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the control pattern setting process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the control pattern setting process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a figure which shows an example of the update condition of the virtual sliding top table at the time of performing stop control by a table + control system. It is a figure which shows an example of the update condition of the virtual sliding top table at the time of performing stop control by a table + control system. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the control content of the modification of a winning determination process, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM, and RAM. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the control content of the modification of a winning determination process, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM, and RAM. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the control content of the modification of a winning determination process, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM, and RAM. It is a block diagram which shows the modification of a structure of a slot machine.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. A slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is rotatable to a housing (not shown) whose front surface is open and a side end of the housing. It consists of a pivoted front door.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have “red 7 (black 7 in the figure)”, “blue 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “bell” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 3), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously provided in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Further, on the front door, a medal insertion portion 4 capable of inserting medals, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) are used for one medal. 1 bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the number of bets, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state within the range (in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state described later) 3 is a MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting a regular bonus to be described later, 1), and the medals stored as credits and the medals used for setting the bets are settled (for setting credits and bets). The payout switch 10 operated when the medal used is returned), the start switch 7 operated when starting the game, the reels 2L, 2C, 2 Stop switch 8L is operated to each stop of the rotation, 8C, 8R are provided.

  The front door also displays a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Also, on the front door, 1 BET LED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 is lit, 2 BET LED 15 that notifies that the bet number is 2 is lit, and that 3 bets are set 3BETLED 16 to notify, the insertion request LED 17 to notify that the medal can be inserted by lighting, the start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, and the weight (previous game) (Waiting for starting reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start) LED 19 during waiting to notify that it is on, LED 20 during replay notifying that it is in a replay game to be described later Is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 3).

  Further, inside the front door, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, changing a set value described later And a set value indicator 24 for displaying the set value at that time during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, is provided in a hopper tank (not shown). ) Side or medal payout outlet 9 side, a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching, and a medal insertion sensor 31 for detecting a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side are provided. ing.

  Inside the casing, a reel unit (not shown) comprising the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R, and the reel sensor 33 capable of detecting the respective reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. A hopper tank (not shown) for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, a hopper motor 34 for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout opening 9, and paying out by driving the hopper motor 34. A payout sensor 35 for detecting a medal and a power supply box (not shown) are provided.

  On the front of the power supply box is a stop switch for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later 36, automatic selection for enabling / disabling the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement at the end of the big bonus, which will be described later (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) It functions as a settlement switch 29, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for releasing an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. Reset / setting that functions as a setting switch to change the set value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of the internal lottery Switch 38, the power switch 39 is provided which is operated to ON / OFF the power.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, as the prescribed number of bets, three are determined in the normal gaming state described later, and one is determined in the regular bonus described later. If medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a combination) is placed on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. The Rukoto. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 100. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The power supply board 100 generates drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies the drive power to each unit.

  The power supply board 100 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the. Further, the above-described hopper motor 34, payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply substrate 100.

  Connected to the game control board 40 are the one-BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, and the reel sensor 33 described above. In addition, the above-described payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply substrate 100, and detection of these connected switches is detected. A signal is input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 100. The hopper motor 34 is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 for controlling the game, random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment) are used. A random number generation circuit 42 for generating, a sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit 44 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 100 , A motor driving circuit 45 that controls the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid driving circuit 46 that controls the driving of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a driving control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power supply voltage supplied to the LED drive circuit 47 and the slot machine 1 to be monitored is monitored. An interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41 when a drop is detected. When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the CPU 41a is not inputted, a reset signal is sent to the CPU 41a. A reset circuit 49 to be applied and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The CPU 41a is provided with a plurality of registers (storage areas) for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing. Specifically, A and F registers (flag registers) that mainly store calculation data, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers that store general-purpose data, and data indicating the position of the program being executed PC register to be stored, SP register to store a stack pointer (an address indicating the current position of a stack area to be described later), an R register to store data indicating a memory block of the RAM 41c performing a refresh operation to be described later, and the RAM 41c There are provided IX and IY registers for storing data indicating a reference position when referring to a storage area, and an I register for storing data indicating the position of an interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 includes a signal input terminal DATA, and detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 are input to the input port via the signal input terminal DATA. The input states of these signal input terminals DATA are monitored by the CPU 41a, and the CPU 41a executes a basic process that shifts in stages according to the input states of the signal input terminals DATA, that is, the detection states of various switches.

  In addition, the CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In this embodiment, four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4 can be executed. For each interrupt, a counter mode (signal input from a trigger terminal CLK / TRG provided separately from the signal input terminal DATA) is provided. Can be selected and set in either an interrupt mode for generating an external interrupt in accordance with the timer mode or an interrupt mode for generating an internal interrupt in accordance with the number of clock inputs to the CPU 41a.

  In the present embodiment, among the interrupts 1 to 4, interrupt 2 is set to the counter mode, interrupt 3 is set to the timer mode, and interrupts 1 and 4 are unused. The trigger terminal CLK / TRG is connected to the above-described power failure detection circuit 48, and the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 2 in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power failure detection circuit 48, and the power failure described later. Execute interrupt processing. Further, the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 3 every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment), and performs a timer interruption process (main) described later. Execute. Moreover, although the interrupts 1 and 4 are set to unused, the interrupts 1 and 4 may generate | occur | produce by noise etc. For this reason, when interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the CPU 41a executes an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the original process.

  The CPU 41a is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any one of interrupts 1 to 4, and a plurality of interrupts occurred simultaneously. In this case, interrupts to be executed with priority in the order of interrupts 2, 3, 1, 4 are set. In other words, when interrupt 2 and other interrupts occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 is prioritized and when interrupt 3 and interrupt 1 or 4 occur simultaneously, interrupt 3 is prioritized. To run.

  Further, the CPU 41a temporarily stores the data in use stored in the register in a later-described stack area provided in the RAM 41c at the start of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any of the interrupts 1 to 4. The data saved in the stack area at the end of the interrupt process is returned to the register.

  As the RAM 41c, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) is used, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 41a is provided with the above-described R (refresh) register for performing this refresh operation. The R register consists of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b, and the value is updated every execution time of one instruction. .

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It is like that.

  Further, the CPU 41a acquires the state of the stop switch 36 and the automatic checkout switch 29 at the time of start-up, and sets the stop function valid / invalid and the automatic checkout function valid / invalid in a specific register of the CPU 41a. It has become. The state of the stop switch 36 and the automatic checkout switch 29 is acquired only at the time of activation, and the stop / automatic checkout function is enabled / disabled based on the acquired state. Even if the switch 29 is operated, the validity / invalidity of the stoppage and automatic settlement function is not newly set.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number. In this embodiment, 0 to 16383 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are not used as they are extracted by the hardware random number function, but are processed and used by software. Details thereof will be described in detail. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main), and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function).

  The CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  Electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), a rendering effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and a reel LED 55 disposed on the front door of the slot machine 1 are connected to the rendering control board 90. The components are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d. The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 for effect control and an effect control board 90. A liquid crystal driving circuit 92 that controls the driving of the connected liquid crystal display 51, a lamp driving circuit 93 that controls the driving of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, and a power source A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 91a when it is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 91a, and other circuits are mounted. The CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40. In addition to performing various controls for production, mounted on production control board 90 Directly or indirectly controls each unit of the control circuit.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt. An interrupt terminal (not shown) of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command among command transmission lines. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. The CPU 91a executes a timer interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Further, unlike the CPU 41a, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal (INT), the CPU 91a interrupts the process even when an interrupt process based on another interrupt is being executed. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the top, and even if another interrupt occurs at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained. It has become.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when the operation is further performed from the setting 6, the setting is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 detects a voltage drop signal, a power interruption interrupt process is executed. In the power interruption interrupt processing, the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and data for destructive diagnosis (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1 in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, that is, other than 0 In addition to storing specific data, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis On the condition that the data value is also correct, the processing state of the CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, but when the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or for destructive diagnosis If the data value is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and a RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error, thereby disabling the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until

  Further, the CPU 41a determines whether or not the bet number set in the game in the internal lottery process described later is a bet number corresponding to the gaming state. And even when the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set and controlled to the RAM abnormal error state, so that the progress of the game is disabled. It is like that. As described above, unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  Further, the CPU 41a executes a set value determination process for determining whether or not a set value used for the internal lottery in the internal lottery process described later is an appropriate value.

  In the set value determination process, the set value determination process 1 for determining whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is within an appropriate range (1 to 6), the set value used for the internal lottery, and the setting set when the setting is changed Setting value determination processing 2 for determining whether or not the values match, whether the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the setting value used for the internal lottery of the previous game match The set value determination process 3 to be determined is executed for each game.

  In the setting value determination process 1, when the setting value used for the internal lottery is not a value in the proper range, or in the setting value determination process 2, the setting value used for the internal lottery, the setting value set when the setting is changed, If the set values do not match or the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game does not match the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game in the set value determination process 3, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. The RAM abnormal error code is set and controlled to the RAM abnormal error state to disable the progress of the game. As described above, unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there are a regular bonus and a normal gaming state as gaming states. Among these, 1 is set as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the regular bonus, and a bet corresponding to the normal gaming state is set. 3 is defined as the prescribed number. For this reason, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, the game can be started when the betting number is set to 1, and when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the game is started when the betting number is set to 3. Can be started. In this embodiment, when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated, and the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is If it is 1, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated when 1 is set as the bet number, and if the specified number is 3 according to the gaming state, 3 is set as the bet number. All winning lines L1 to L5 are activated.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  FIG. 4A shows the winning combination table. The winning combination table is stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41, and the combination numbers (1 to 14) assigned in the order in which the lottery is performed corresponding to combinations of combinations and combinations to be selected in the internal drawing. ) Is registered.

  In the slot machine 1, as a special role, a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a regular bonus, a cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and a bell as a small role are replayed. Replay is defined as a role. In addition, combinations of combinations in the slot machine 1 include big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus (1) +1 (1), big bonus (2) +1 (1), Big bonus (1) +1 (2) and big bonus (2) +1 (2) are defined. That is, the total of the combination of combinations and combinations is 14.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4A, the combination of combinations and combinations of combinations that are subject to lottery differ depending on whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state or a regular bonus. . Furthermore, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it depends on whether any special role is being carried over (whether any special role has already been set in the winning flag of the special role). The combination of combinations and combinations that are subject to lottery are also different. In this embodiment, a state number corresponding to the gaming state is assigned, and when performing an internal lottery, a state number corresponding to the current gaming state is set, and a role to be a lottery object is determined according to this state number. It becomes possible to specify. Specifically, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “0” is set as the state number, and when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “1” is set as the state number, and “2” is set as the state number in the case of a regular bonus.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and no special combination is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “0”, the big bonus (1 ), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus, Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2), Replay, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), Bell, ie all roles and combinations of roles are internal lottery It becomes the object of. When the game state is the normal game state and any special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “1”, replay, cherry, 1 (1), 1 The sheet (2), the bell, that is, the combination of the combination and combination after the combination number 10 is the target of the internal lottery. When the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “2” is set as the state number, cherry, one piece (1), one piece (2), bell, that is, the combination of the combination and combination after the combination number 11 The combination is subject to internal lottery.

  Cherry is awarded when the “Cherry” symbol is derived on one of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and two medals are paid out in the normal gaming state. 15 medals are paid out. If the “Cherry” symbol stops at the upper or lower level of the left reel, the combination of cherries will be aligned on the two winning lines L2 and L4 or the winning lines L3 and L5. Since you won the cherry on the winning line, 4 medals will be paid out in the normal gaming state, but in the regular bonus, even if you win the cherry on the 2 winning lines, one game Since the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out at 15 is set to 15, only 15 medals are paid out. One (1) is awarded when the combination of “Blue 7-Red 7-Watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out in the normal gaming state. In the regular bonus, 15 medals are paid out. One (2) is awarded when the combination of “Red 7-Blue 7-Watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out in the normal gaming state. In the regular bonus, 15 medals are paid out. A bell is awarded when a combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is placed on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and in the normal gaming state, 8 medals are paid out. 15 medals are paid out.

  Replay is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When a replay is won, the medals will not be paid out, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets no longer required to be set in the next game (the regular bonus will not be replayed and will always be 3) This is substantially the same as when three corresponding medals are paid out.

  The regular bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the regular bonus. The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  The big bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” or a combination of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the big bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus. When transitioning to the big bonus, the transition to the regular bonus is performed at the same time as the transition to the big bonus. Controlled by regular bonus. That is, during the big bonus, the regular bonus is always controlled. The big bonus ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus reaches 466. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the game state is the big bonus, the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  When it is necessary to distinguish between the big bonus by “red 7-red 7-red 7” and the big bonus by “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7”, the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2 ). Further, the regular bonus, the big bonus (1), and the big bonus (2) described above may be simply referred to as “bonus”.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, as will be described later, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired. And, for each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state, according to the obtained random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values of each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state and setting value Done. In this embodiment, based on the number of judgment values for each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination, and a range of determination values for the combination of general combination and special combination is won. And the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general combination and a special combination may be won simultaneously in one game. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are drawn exclusively.

  Each combination and combination of combinations determined according to the game state are referred to in the order of combination numbers registered in the winning combination table shown in FIG.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and no special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “0”, the winning combination table is referred to and the combination of the combination numbers 1 to 14 is referred to. And combinations of combinations, that is, big bonus (1) [port number 1], big bonus (2) [port number 2], regular bonus [port number 3], big bonus (1) + cherry [port number 4], big Bonus (2) + cherry [role number 5], big bonus (1) +1 (1) [role 6], big bonus (2) +1 (1) [role 7], big bonus (1) +1 Sheet (2) [Role No. 8], Big Bonus (2) +1 (2) [Role No. 9], Replay [Role No. 10], Cherry [Role No. 11], 1 (1) [Role No. 12] 1 sheet (2) [role number 13], Le [winning number 14 are sequentially read as a target combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and any special combination is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “1”, the winning combination table is referred to, 14 roles and combinations of roles, that is, replay [role number 10], cherry [role number 11], 1 sheet (1) [role number 12], 1 sheet (2) [role number 13], bell [role number 14 ] Are sequentially read out as a target combination of the internal lottery.

  Further, when the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “2” is set as the state number, the winning combination table is referred to and combinations of the combinations of the combination numbers 11 to 14, that is, cherry [portion number 11]. 1 sheet (1) [port number 12], 1 sheet (2) [port number 13], and bell [port number 14] are sequentially read out as the internal lottery target roles.

  In the internal lottery, when the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles and the state number indicating the current gaming state are added to the random number for internal lottery, and the result of the addition overflows In addition, it is determined that the combination or combination of combinations is won.

  Then, when winning of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, the winning flag corresponding to the combination of combination or combination determined to be selected is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c. Set. The internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the special role winning flag is set, and the lower byte is general. It is assigned as a general role storage work in which the winning flag of the role is set. Specifically, when any of the roles (special roles) of the role numbers 1 to 3 is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, and the general role is stored. Clear the winning flag set for the workpiece. In addition, when any of the role numbers 4 to 9 (special role + general role) is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, A winning combination flag indicating that the general combination has been won is set in the general combination storing work. If any of the combination numbers 10 to 14 (general combination) is won, a general combination winning flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination or winning combination is won, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  The number of determination values of each combination and combination of combinations is read according to the storage address of the number of determination values registered in the role-specific table stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41.

  FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an example of the role-specific table. The number of determination values may be 256 or more, and cannot be stored in one byte. Therefore, each determination value number is registered using a storage area of two bytes. The number of determination values is registered in correspondence with the above-described state number that can specify the gaming state. This is because even if the combination is the same combination or combination, the winning probabilities may differ depending on the gaming state. The number of determination values may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  In the role table, as shown in FIG. 4B, the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus ( 1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Replay, Cherry, 1 (1) One (2), the storage address of the number of determination values of the bell is registered.

  Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus, Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 ( 1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2) are the roles that are subject to internal lottery when no special roles are carried over in the normal gaming state The storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the state number 0 is registered. For the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus, the common flag is 0, and the storage address of the determination value number is individually registered according to the set value. Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big For bonus (2) +1 (2), the common flag is 1, and the storage address of the common number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Replay is a combination that is subject to internal lottery regardless of whether or not a special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to state numbers 0 and 1 is registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Cherry, 1 (1), 2 (2) are roles that are subject to internal lottery in any gaming state, and correspond to the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding to state number 0 and state number 1 A storage address for the number of determination values to be stored and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to state number 2 are registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  The bell is a role that is subject to internal lottery in any gaming state, the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the state number 0, the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the state number 1, and the state number 2 And the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to each are registered. The common flag for this combination is 0, and the storage addresses for the number of determination values are individually registered according to the set value.

  Also, the number of medals to be paid out when winning each winning combination is registered in the role-specific table. However, only the cherry, which is a small role, 1 (1), 1 (2), and a bell, is a target for paying out medals when winning a prize. These small roles can be awarded in any gaming state, but when the state number is 2, that is, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, when the state number is 0, that is, the gaming state More medals are paid out than when the player is in the normal gaming state. In addition, when “cherry” stops at the upper or lower stage of the left reel, the combination of cherries is aligned on the two pay lines as described above, so the total number of payouts is paid out. It will be. In this embodiment, since the number of cherries paid out is 2 in the normal gaming state, 4 medals are paid out. In the regular bonus, the number of cherries paid out is 15, but the total number exceeds the upper limit of 15, so in this case, 15 medals are paid out.

  The big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus winning are accompanied by a transition of the gaming state and are not eligible for paying out medals. The replay does not involve the payout of medals, but it is substantially the same as the payout of 3 medals since it is not necessary to insert medals used for setting the bet amount in the next game (always the normal gaming state).

  FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a storage area for the number of determination values acquired based on addresses registered in the role-specific table. The storage area for the number of determination values is provided in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 in the development model, and in the address area allocated to the ROM 41b in the main control unit 41 in the mass production model.

  For example, when the address ADD is a game state of state number 0, that is, in a state where no special combination is carried over in the normal game state, the target combination of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) and the set value is 1. This is an address to be referred to, and at this time, 15 which is the value stored here is acquired as the number of determination values. Addresses ADD + 2, ADD + 4, ADD + 6, ADD + 8, and ADD + 10 are addresses that are referred to when the target role of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) and the set value is 2 to 6 in the gaming state of state number 0. . Addresses ADD + 12, ADD + 14, ADD + 16, ADD + 18, ADD + 20, and ADD + 22 are addresses that are referred to when the internal lottery target role is the big bonus (2) and the set value is 1 to 6 in the game state of state number 0. It is. Addresses ADD + 24, ADD + 26, ADD + 28, ADD + 30, ADD + 32, and ADD + 34 are addresses that are referred to when the target character of the internal lottery is a regular bonus and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively, in the game state of state number 0.

  Regarding the big bonus (1) and big bonus (2) in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the state where no special combination is carried over in the normal game state, the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value. In addition, since different numbers of determination values are stored, the winning probabilities of these combinations and combinations of combinations differ depending on the set values.

  On the other hand, for the regular bonus in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the state where no special combination is carried over in the normal game state, the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value. Since the number of determination values is stored, the regular bonus winning probability is the same for any set value.

  In addition, the address ADD + 36 is set to the set value when the internal lottery target role is big bonus (1) + cherry in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the normal game state where no special role is carried over. Regardless of the address to be referred to, the address ADD + 38 is the big bonus (2) + in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the normal game state where no special combination is carried over. This address is referred to regardless of the set value when it is a cherry, and the address ADD + 40 is an object of the internal lottery in the game state of the state number 0, that is, in the state where no special role is carried over in the normal game state This address is referenced regardless of the setting value when the winning combination is a big bonus (1) + 1 (1) The address ADD + 42 is a set value when the internal lottery target role is a big bonus (2) +1 (1) in the game state of state number 0, that is, in a state where no special combination is carried over in the normal game state Regardless of the address that is referenced, the address ADD + 44 is a big bonus (1) in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the normal game state where no special combination is carried over. +1 (2) is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value, and the address ADD + 46 is state number 0, that is, in the gaming state in which no special role is carried over in the normal gaming state, This address is referred to regardless of the set value when the target for internal lottery is Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2)

  The address ADD + 48 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 0 and the state number is 1, that is, in the normal game state, when the target combination of the internal lottery is replay.

  The address ADD + 50 is referred to regardless of the set value when the target number of the internal lottery is cherry in the state number 0, that is, in the gaming state in which no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state. Address. The address ADD + 52 is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 1, that is, in the gaming state in which any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, when the target combination of the internal lottery is cherry. Address. The address ADD + 54 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 2, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target part of the internal lottery is cherry.

  The address ADD + 56 is irrespective of the set value when the state number is 0, that is, in the gaming state in which no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, and when the number of target combination for internal lottery is one (1). This address is referred to by The address ADD + 58 is related to the set value when the state number is 1, that is, in the gaming state in which any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, and the number of target combination of internal lottery is one (1). This address is referred to without The address ADD + 60 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 2, that is, in the regular bonus, when the number of target combination of internal lottery is one (1).

  The address ADD + 62 is set regardless of the set value when the number of the target combination of the internal lottery is one (2) in the state number 0, that is, in the gaming state in which no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state. This address is referred to by The address ADD + 64 is related to the set value when the state number is 1, that is, in the gaming state in which any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, when the target combination of the internal lottery is one (2). This address is referred to without The address ADD + 66 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 2, that is, in the regular bonus, when the number of target characters for internal lottery is one (2).

  Addresses ADD + 68, ADD + 70, ADD + 72, ADD + 74, ADD + 76, and ADD + 78 are in the gaming state of state number 0 and state number 1, that is, in the normal gaming state, and the target role of the internal lottery is Bell and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively. This address is referred to by The addresses ADD + 80, ADD + 82, ADD + 84, ADD + 86, ADD + 88, and ADD + 90 are addresses that are referred to when the target role of the internal lottery is the bell and the set value is 1 to 6 in the game state of state number 2, that is, the regular bonus. It is. Regarding the bell in the gaming state of state number 2, the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value, but the number of determination values of setting values 1 and 2, the number of determination values of 3 and 4, 5 and 6 Since the common determination value number is stored in each of the determination value numbers, the winning probabilities of the setting values 1 and 2 are the same, the winning probabilities of the 3 and 4 are common.

  FIGS. 6A to 6C are diagrams illustrating an example of the relationship between the value of a random number for internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination and combination of combinations, and winning. FIG. 6 (a) shows that no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 6 (b) shows a case where any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state. Here are some examples of regular bonuses. 6A to 6C show an example in which the set value is 6. FIG.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 6 (a), when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the regular bonus, the big bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Replay, Cherry, 1 sheet (1), 1 sheet (2), Bell is subject to internal lottery. 10, 5, 5, 5, 5, 2245, 76, 153, 153, 2082. First, the big bonus (1) subject to the internal lottery is determined by adding the judgment value number of 20 and the result of addition overflows when 16364 to 16383 are acquired as random numbers for the internal lottery. Become.

  Next, the big bonus (2) that is the subject of the internal lottery is obtained by adding 40, which is the sum of the judgment value number 20 of the big bonus (1) and the judgment value number 20 of the big bonus (2). The winning combination is obtained when 16344 to 16363, which will overflow, are obtained as random numbers for internal lottery. Similarly, the regular bonus is a big bonus when 16313 to 16343 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and the big bonus (1) + cherry is a big bonus when 16303 to 1631 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. (2) + Cherry is obtained when 16293-16302 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1) is acquired when 16288-16292 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery , Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), 16283 to 16287 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), random numbers for internal lottery are 16278 to 16282 As a big bonus (2) + 1 (2), 16273-16277 are random numbers for internal lottery The replay is acquired when 14028-16272 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and the cherry is 1 (1) when 13952-14027 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. ) When 13799 to 13951 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, 1 (2) is when 11646 to 13798 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, When it is acquired as a random number for lottery, it is determined that each is a win. When 0 to 11563 are obtained as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  The approximate winning probability of each combination and combination of combinations calculated based on the number of judgment values is the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus ( 2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Replay , Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), Bell, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 528.5, 1/1638, 1/1638, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1 / 7.3, 1 / 215.6, 1 / 107.1, 1 / 107.1, and 1 / 7.87.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6B, when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, only replay, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and bell are inside. Since the number of determination values for each combination is 2245, 96, 163, 163, 2082 at the set value 6, it is 14139-16383, 14043-14138, 13880-14042, 13717-13879, 11635. When ˜13716 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, each is determined to be a winner. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities for each combination are 1 / 7.3, 1 / 170.7, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 7.87. When 0-11634 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6C, in the regular bonus, only the cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and bell are subject to internal lottery. Since the determination value numbers are 96, 163, 163, and 15919, when 16288 to 16383, 16125 to 16287, 15962 to 16124, and 43 to 15961 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, they are determined to be winning. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 170.7, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 1.03. When 0 to 55823 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all the combinations are lost.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  In this embodiment, as a reel stop control method, stop control based on the sliding frame number data in the stop control table registered in advance in the ROM 41b (hereinafter also referred to as a table method), and a retractable position is searched for each stop operation timing. In addition, three methods of stop control based on the search result (hereinafter also referred to as control method) and stop control by both table method and control method (hereinafter also referred to as table + control method) are adopted, and the result of internal lottery The stop control is performed by either method depending on

  Which of these three methods is used for stop control is determined in advance. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, when the result of the internal lottery is lost, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, Stop control is performed by the table method. When the result of the internal lottery is bell, replay, big bonus (1) + replay, big bonus (2) + replay, regular bonus + replay, stop control is performed by the control method. Further, when the result of the internal lottery is bonus + small combination, stop control is performed by the table + control method.

  The stop control table used when stop control is performed by the table method and the table + control method is registered in advance in the ROM 41b, and is selected with reference to the table index stored in the ROM 41b.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the table index stores index data indicating the start address of the area in which the stop control table is stored from the reference address (table_index) for referring to the table index for each winning combination. Differences up to the address are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the winning combination is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address (table_index).

  In this embodiment, the individual stop control table is not used for all the results of the internal lottery, but in the case of bell, replay, bonus + replay, stop control is performed only by the control method, and bonus + general combination In order to use the stop control table corresponding to the winning of only the bonus, the table index includes lose, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), For each regular bonus, index data indicating the start address of the area in which the stop control table is stored is stored.

  The stop control table includes slip frame number data indicating the number of slide frames corresponding to the stop operation position, and an address of the slip frame number data to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The sliding frame number data referred in accordance with the stop status of the reel includes the first stop, the second stop, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, 3. There may be differences depending on whether the left and middle reels are stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, or one of the reels is stopped. Since the situation may differ depending on the stop position of the stopped reel, for each situation, the address of the sliding frame number data to be referenced is registered for each rotating reel, and the start address of the stop control table Based on the above, it is possible to identify the address of the sliding frame number data to be referred to according to each situation, and from this identified address to each situation Flip has become possible to identify the sliding frame number data required.

  Even if the reel stop status and the stopped position of the reels that have been stopped are different as a result of the internal lottery, if the same sliding frame number data is applied, the same address is registered as the address of the sliding frame number data. In such a case, the same sliding frame number data is referred to.

  The sliding frame number data is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. As shown in FIG. 13, 21 regions (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one reel. Area numbers 1 to 21 from the position are assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. In the sliding frame number data, the sliding frame number by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the sliding frame number by area number can be obtained by expanding the sliding frame number data. It has become.

  Here, the content of the stop control according to the stop control method will be described.

  First, when the CPU 41a performs stop control by the table method, that is, the result of the internal lottery is lost, 1 (1), 1 (2), cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular In the case of the bonus, as shown in FIG. 9, when the reel starts to rotate, or when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains, before the reel stop operation becomes effective. At the stage, referring to the table index, if there is a stopped reel as a result of the internal lottery for the unstopped reel, the sliding frame number data of the stop control table corresponding to the stop position of the reel is selected.

  Then, the selected sliding frame number data is expanded and stored in a virtual sliding frame table (see FIG. 13) assigned to the RAM 41c for each reel.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the virtual sliding top table, for each reel, the area corresponding to each area number corresponds to the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol area in the perspective window 3). ) (The number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the step number of each area number), and the number of sliding frames when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected is stored. The number of sliding symbols developed from the sliding frame number data is stored in correspondence with the corresponding area number of the corresponding reel.

  FIG. 14 shows that when all the reels are rotating and none of the winning combinations are won in the normal gaming state (losing), one bonus (1) is won without any bonus being carried over. If there is one (1), no bonus has been carried over and one (2) has been won (1 (2)), no bonus has been carried over and cherry Is elected (Cherry), Big Bonus (1) or Regular Bonus is elected and no other character is elected (BB (1) RB), Big Bonus (2) is elected FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the sliding frame number data of the left reel that is selected when the other combination is not won (BB (2)), and when all reels are rotating, these sliding frame number data Out of It is deployed sliding frame number data corresponding to the winning combination, so that the number of each sliding frame is stored in the virtual sliding symbols table as the number of sliding symbols of the left reel.

  Next, after storing the number of sliding frames developed from the sliding frame number data in the virtual sliding frame table, the stop operation is validated, and in this state, one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel. When the stop operation is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is identified based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected, and the virtual sliding frame table of the reel where the stop operation is detected , The number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired. Then, based on the acquired number of sliding symbols, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames until the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Do. As a result, an area (stop point in the figure) corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the area (stop operation point in the figure) corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position in which the stop operation is detected. It stops at the stop reference position (in the present embodiment, the lower symbol area of the see-through window 3).

  Next, when the CPU 41a performs stop control by the control method, as shown in FIG. 10, the reel stop operation becomes effective when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Based on the result of the internal lottery for reels that have not been stopped in the previous stage, the stop position corresponding to the result of the internal lottery for each stop operation position based on the stop position of the reel that has been stopped (the stop position where the winning combination is aligned on the winning line) )

  Specifically, for each stop operation position, a stop position for each of the 0 to 4 sliding frames is specified, and each of these stop positions is determined for illegal winning (a role not won in the internal lottery) and a stop prohibited position ( In the case of a stop, a determination is made of a stop position where it is not possible to avoid illegal winnings or duplicate winnings on an unstopped reel. If it is an illegal winning or stop prohibiting position, a stop prohibiting position flag is set.

  Then, the stop position according to the number of sliding frames from 0 to 4 is determined according to the combination of the winning positions in accordance with the combination (the number of sliding frames is 4, 3, In the case of 2, 1, 0 order, replay, bonus + replay, the number of sliding frames is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4), and the winning combination is determined to be the stop position on the winning line. If the stop prohibition position flag is not set for the stop position, the stop position is acquired and if the stop prohibition position flag is not set, the stop position is acquired. The number of sliding frames as the position is stored in the area number of the corresponding stop operation position of the corresponding reel in the virtual sliding frame table.

  Even if it is determined that the winning combination is a stop position on the winning line, if the stop prohibition position flag is set for the stop position, the next stop position is determined. In addition, if there is no stop position where the winning combination is aligned on the winning line even after determining the stop positions of all the number of sliding frames, the number of sliding frames that will be the last determined stopping position is indicated in the virtual sliding frame table. Stored in the area number of the reel to be operated and the corresponding stop operation position. That is, in the case of a bell, the number of sliding frames is 4, and in the case of replay, 0 is stored. In addition, when the stop prohibition position flag is set for the last determined stop position, the number of slip frames that is acquired retroactively to the stop position for which the stop prohibition position flag is not set and becomes the acquired stop position Is stored in the area number of the corresponding stop operation position of the corresponding reel in the virtual sliding top table. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the symbols “bell” and “replay” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on all reels, and the reels are pulled in and stopped within the range of 0 to 5 frames. Since it is always possible to align the bells or replays on the winning line, the number of sliding symbols as the stop position where the winning combination is always aligned on the winning line is stored.

  After the number of sliding symbols is stored for all the area numbers of the rotating reels in the virtual sliding frame table, the stop operation is validated, and in this state, among the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the rotating reels When any corresponding operation is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is specified based on the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, and the reel of which the stop operation is detected With reference to the virtual sliding top table, the number of sliding tops corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired. Then, based on the acquired number of sliding symbols, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, when the CPU 41a performs stop control by the table + control method, that is, when the result of the internal lottery is bonus + pocket, as shown in FIG. 11, when the reel starts to rotate, When there are still reels that have stopped and are still rotating, the table index is referenced before the reel stop operation becomes effective, and there are reels that have stopped as a result of the internal lottery for the unstopped reels. In this case, the sliding frame number data in the stop control table corresponding to the stop position of the reel is selected.

  Then, the selected number of sliding frames is expanded to acquire the number of sliding frames for each stop operation position, and the acquired number of sliding frames is stored in the corresponding area number of the corresponding reel in the virtual sliding frame table.

  Next, as a result of the internal lottery, a stoppable position is searched for each stop operation position based on the stop position of the stopped reel.

  Specifically, for each stop operation position, a stop position for each of the 0 to 4 sliding frames is specified, and each of these stop positions is determined for illegal winning (a role not won in the internal lottery) and a stop prohibited position ( In the case of a stop, a determination is made of a stop position where it is not possible to avoid illegal winnings or duplicate winnings on an unstopped reel. If it is an illegal winning or stop prohibiting position, a stop prohibiting position flag is set.

  Then, the priority of the stop position searched by the number of sliding frames of 0 to 4 is compared with the priority of the stopping position by the number of sliding frames developed from the sliding frame number data stored in the virtual sliding frame table. . At this time, the comparison is performed in the order shown in FIG. 12A in accordance with the number of sliding symbols stored in the virtual sliding frame table. For example, if the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table is 0, the stopping position of the sliding frame number 0, the stopping position of the sliding frame number 3, the stopping position of the sliding frame number 1, and the stopping of the sliding frame number 2 The position is compared in the order of the stop position with 4 sliding frames.

  Then, as a result of the comparison, it is determined whether or not the priority of the stop position retrieved by the number of sliding frames is higher than the priority of the stopping position by the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table. As shown in FIG. 12B, the priority of the stop position is higher in the stop position where the winning combination is aligned on any winning line than the stop position where the winning combination is not aligned on any winning line. If the winning combination is a bonus + small role, the stop position where the bonus is aligned on any winning line has a higher priority than the stop position where the small role is aligned on any winning line. Judge as high. Also, in the first stop and the second stop, if the winning combination is a bonus + small combination, if there is a stop position where both the winning bonus and the small combination are on the winning line, the stop position is set independently. It is determined that the priority is higher than the stop position where bonuses and small roles are aligned on the winning line. When determining the priority of the stop position, as shown in FIG. 12B, a priority table in which the priorities of the stop position types are set is provided, and either stop is referred to by referring to the priority table. Whether or not the position priority is high may be determined, or according to a predetermined priority (priority shown in FIG. 12B), a stop position with a high priority is a stop with a low priority. A program in which it is determined that the priority is higher than the position (for example, whether or not both stop positions are stop positions where the winning combinations are aligned, one is a stop position where the winning combinations are not aligned, and the other is If it is a stop position where the winning combination is aligned, it is determined that the stop position where the winning combination is aligned has a higher priority. If it is a bonus + small role, whether both stop positions are the stop positions where the bonus is aligned Whether or not it is a stop position where the small roles are aligned. If one is a stop position where bonuses or small roles are aligned, and the other is a stop position where neither bonuses nor small roles are aligned, it is determined that the stop position where bonuses or small roles are aligned is higher in priority, One is a stop position where bonuses are arranged, and the other is a stop position where bonuses are arranged but bonuses are not arranged, such that the stop position where bonuses are arranged is judged to have higher priority) Thus, it may be determined whether the priority of which stop position is high.

  As a result of the comparison, if it is determined that the priority of the stop position searched by the number of sliding frames is higher than the priority of the stopping position by the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table, It is determined whether or not the stop prohibition position flag is set for the stop position searched by the number of sliding frames. If the stop prohibition position flag is not set, the corresponding stop operation of the corresponding reel in the virtual sliding top table The number of sliding symbols stored in the position area number is updated to the number of sliding symbols that are the stop positions searched by the number of sliding frames.

  Even if it is determined that the priority of the stop position searched for by the number of sliding frames is higher, if the stop prohibition position flag is set for that stop position, priority is given to the next stop position. Compare degrees.

  In addition, even when compared with the stop positions of all the number of sliding frames, the priority of the stopping position searched by the number of sliding frames is more than the priority of the stopping position based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table. If it is not determined to be high, the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table is not updated, and the number of sliding frames developed from the sliding frame number data is maintained.

  For example, when the big bonus (1) + bell is won and all reels are still rotating, as shown in FIG. 15, the area numbers 1 to 16, 20, and 21 of the left reel are slippery. Since there is no stop position higher than the stop position priority based on the number of sliding frames developed from the number of sliding frames, there is no stop position specified by the number of sliding frames, so the virtual sliding frame table developed from the sliding frame number data The number of sliding frames stored in is maintained. In addition, for the region numbers 17 to 19, there are stop positions higher than the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding symbols developed from the number of sliding symbols, and therefore the earliest in the order shown in FIG. It is determined that the priority is high at the stage, and the number of sliding frames (3 for the area numbers 17 and 18 and 0 for the area number 19) is the virtual number of sliding frames that are the stop positions that are not stop prohibition positions. Update the number of sliding frames on the table.

  After the comparison of the priority of the number of sliding frames is completed for all the area numbers of the rotating reels in the virtual sliding frame table, the stop operation is validated, and in this state, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is rotated. When any operation corresponding to the inside reel is detected effectively, the stop operation position is identified based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected, and the stop operation is detected. The number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is obtained with reference to the virtual sliding frame table of the reels thus specified. Then, based on the acquired number of sliding symbols, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In this embodiment, since the number of sliding frames is always in the range of 0 to 4, it is possible to stop the reel by drawing a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting the stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of up to 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In the table index, the winning combination is assigned to the address corresponding to the case where one (1), one (2), cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus is won. The index data specifying the stop control table with the number of sliding frames to be pulled in so that the winning combination is not gathered in the range of 4 frames is stored, and the address corresponding to the case of loss is In addition to storing index data that identifies the stop control table with the number of sliding frames to be drawn so that none of the roles are aligned, even when stopping control is performed using the control method, the winning combination is within the range of 4 frames. The maximum number of sliding frames to be drawn is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. Furthermore, also in the table + control system, the number of sliding frames that draws the winning combination to the maximum within the range of 4 frames is preferentially stored in the virtual sliding frame table.

  Therefore, either if they won useful, regardless of the method of the stop control, pull maximize winning combinations in the range of 4 frames, the number of sliding frames draw such role has not been elected not aligned There are stored in the virtual sliding symbols table, while the stop control of the reels is performed, if not won in any winning combination, the number of sliding frames that are not available any winning combination is stored in the virtual sliding symbols table, the reel The stop control is performed. Thus, when the stopping operation is performed, if align the symbols on the winning combination is won by pull-in range of up to 4 frames be stopped on the pay line, control is performed to stop aligned this, The symbol of the winning combination is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  Further, when the result of the internal lottery is a bonus + pocket, the number of sliding symbols developed from the sliding frame number data of the stop control table corresponding to the winning bonus is stored in the virtual sliding piece table, and The stop operation position outside the bonus pull-in range is updated to the number of sliding frames that will be stopped at the winning line with a maximum of 4 winning draws on the winning line. If the bonus symbols that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line can be stopped on the winning line at the same time, the control is performed to stop them and the maximum 4 frames on the winning line If you are unable to withdraw bonuses that have been won in the draw range, you can suspend all the small roles that have been won in the draw range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. Control is performed to stop by aligning the symbol winning combination that has not been elected, and thus the control to stop Te removed in pull-in range of 4 frames is performed. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the bonus on the winning line is prioritized over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the bonus cannot be drawn.

  When the result of the internal lottery is bonus + replay, the number of sliding frames that are the stop positions for stopping and stopping the replays on the winning line within a maximum of 4 frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. When a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the replays are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. As will be described later, “Replay” is arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and is always stopped at an arbitrary position within the drawing range of 4 frames. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is bonus + replay, the replay will always be won and won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the replay on the winning line is prioritized over the bonus, and the replay always wins.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the “bell” and “replay” are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames, for all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It can be stopped at any position within the range. That is, when the bell or replay is won, the winning combination can be always won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player.

  On the other hand, “Red 7”, “Blue 7”, “BAR”, and “Cherry” are not necessarily arranged within 5 symbols, so if any bonus is won or 1 (1 ) If one (2) cherries is winning, the winning combination cannot be aligned on the winning line unless the corresponding symbol is within the drawing range. That is, depending on the stop operation position, it may not be possible to win.

  Further, in this embodiment, the stop control method, the table method and the table + control method stop corresponding to one internal lottery result in one game state and the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel). The sliding frame number data to be referred to when performing control, the search order of the stop position when performing stop control with the control method, and the order of determining the priority of the stop position when performing stop control with the table + control method are unique. The number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table is also unique to one internal lottery result in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Become. For this reason, when all of the gaming state, the internal lottery result, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel stop control is performed based on the same control pattern. It becomes.

  Next, chance eyes and reach eyes will be described. The chance in the present embodiment is a display mode that can be derived when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, or when one (1) or one (2) is won. In this embodiment, the display result of the left reel is “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4, or “Bell Red 7 Bell” of No. 8-10, “Replay of No. 15-17 "Blue 7 Watermelon" stops and no display of the winning lines is on the winning line. As a result of displaying the middle reel, "Cherry Replay Cherry" of No. 11-13, 21, 1, 2 The “Cherry Bell Cherry” of the design stops, and the display mode in which none of the roles are aligned on the winning line and the display result of the right reel are “Replay Cherry Blue 7” of the 10th to 12th designs. Stop and any Have applied the display mode also not aligned on a winning line as a chance eyes.

  The reach eye is a display mode that can be derived only when any bonus (big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus) is won in the normal gaming state. As a result of the display on the left reel, the display mode in which “blue 7 / watermelon / blue 7” of symbols 16-18 is stopped is the reach of all bonuses, and symbols 20, 20, 1, 1 or 12-14 The display mode in which the symbol “Replay Watermelon Bell” has stopped and none of the roles are on the winning line is applied as the reach of the big bonus (1) or regular bonus.

  Further, in this embodiment, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state, or when one (1), one (2) is won, each reel 2L, 2C, 2R Regardless of the order in which the stop operations are performed, it is controlled so that chances can be derived. Regardless of the order in which they are performed, the reach is controlled so that it can be derived. You may be able to derive your chance and reach.

  Here, an example of the reel stop control when deriving the chance and reach will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 14 shows a case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), and one piece (1) is won in a state where no bonus is carried over (1 piece (1)). If none of the bonuses have been carried over and 1 (2) has been won (1 (2)), if no bonus has been carried over and the cherry has been won (Cherry), If the big bonus (1) or regular bonus is won and no other role is won (BB (1) RB), the big bonus (2) is won and no other role is won It is a figure which shows the sliding frame number data of the left reel selected in case (BB (2)).

  First, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the sliding frame number data corresponding to the item of losing in FIG. 14 is selected as the sliding frame number data of the left reel. This sliding frame number data includes 2 to 4 symbols “Replay Watermelon Bell”, 8 to 10 symbols “Bell Red 7 Bell”, 15 to 17 symbols for all area numbers. “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon”, No. 12-14 “Replay / Watermelon Bell”, No. 16-18 “Blue 7 / Watermelon / Blue 7”, 20, 21, No. 1 “Replay”・ The number of sliding symbols for which display results other than “watermelon bell” are specified is determined, and the display result of 2 to 2 constituting a chance eye when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any timing 4th symbol “Replay / Watermelon / Bell”, 8-10th symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”, 15th to 17th symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” "Replay watermelon bell" of the 12-14th pattern, No. 6-18 symbols "Blue 7 / Watermelon / Blue 7", 20, 21, No. 1 symbols "Replay / Watermelon / Bell" are not derived as display results, and finally chances and reach eyes Does not hold.

  When one (1) is won in a state where no bonus has been carried over in the normal gaming state (1 (1)), one piece of FIG. the number of sliding symbols data corresponding to the item 1) is selected. In this sliding frame number data, a display result is specified in which “blue 7” that constitutes one (1) combination stops on any winning line for the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21. In particular, for the region numbers 18 and 19, the number of sliding symbols for specifying “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the symbols 15 to 17 is determined. In addition, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for the region numbers 4 to 8, and “Bell Red 7 Bell” of the symbols 8 to 10 is specified for the region numbers 10 to 14. The number of sliding frames is determined, and the number of sliding frames is specified, in which display results other than the display results including the display mode that configures the chance eyes and the reach eyes for other area numbers are specified.

  Therefore, the timings of the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21, that is, the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (1) can be drawn in a range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation of the left reel is detected at a possible timing, a display result in which the “blue 7” symbols constituting one (1) combination stop on any winning line is derived. In particular, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timings of the area numbers 18 and 19 among the timings at which the “Blue 7” symbol can be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames and stopped on any of the pay lines The 15th to 17th symbols “Replay Blue 7 Watermelon” are derived, and if one (1) combination is not complete on the winning line, other winning combinations will be aligned on the winning line. Since there is nothing, chances will be established. Also, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timings of the region numbers 4 to 8 among the timings at which the “blue 7” symbol cannot be drawn in the range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on the winning line, When “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is derived as a display result, and a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 10 to 14, “bell bell” of symbols 8 to 10 is detected. “Red 7 Bell” is derived as the display result, and in these cases, the winning combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, and therefore, a chance chance is established. In addition, even if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any other timing, the display mode constituting the chance eyes and reach eyes is not derived as the display result, and the chance eyes and reach eyes are finally obtained. Is not true.

  In addition, among the display results constituting these chance eyes, a stop operation is detected at a timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, that is, at a timing at which one (1) cannot be won. Stop operation position (area number) where the number of sliding symbols specifying “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of symbols 2-4 and “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of symbols 8-10 are determined. Is greater than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) in which the number of sliding symbols for which the display result of “Blue 7” stopping on any winning line is specified is 1 in the normal gaming state. In the case where only the sheet (1) has been won, a higher rate than the display result in which “blue 7” constituting the combination of the sheet (1) stops on any winning line is derived, Chance eyes Among the displayed results, the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the 8th to 10th symbols derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing when one (1) cannot be won. "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" will be derived.

  In the normal game state, when no bonus has been carried over and 1 (2) is won (1 (2)), the number of sliding frames on the left reel is 1 ( The sliding frame number data corresponding to the item 2) is selected. In this sliding frame number data, for the region numbers 9 to 15, the number of sliding frames in which “red 7” constituting a combination of one (2) stops on any winning line is specified. In particular, for the region numbers 12 and 13, the number of sliding symbols for specifying “bell, red 7 and bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols is determined. In addition, “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for region numbers 6 to 8, and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is specified for region numbers 17 to 21. The number of sliding frames is determined, and the number of sliding frames is specified, in which display results other than the display results including the display mode that configures the chance eyes and the reach eyes for other area numbers are specified.

  Therefore, the timing of the area numbers 9 to 15, that is, the timing at which the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (2) can be drawn in the range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation of the left reel is detected, a display result in which the “red 7” symbols constituting one (2) combination stop on any winning line is derived. In particular, when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 12 and 13 among the timing at which the “red 7” symbol can be drawn in a range of up to 4 frames and stopped on any of the pay lines The 8th to 10th symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” are derived, and if one (2) combination is not completed on the winning line, other winning combinations will be aligned on the winning line. Since there is nothing, chances will be established. Also, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6 to 8 among the timings at which the “red 7” symbol cannot be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames and stopped on the winning line, When the “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is derived as a display result and the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 17 to 21, “replay “Blue 7 / Watermelon” is derived as the display result, and in these cases, the winning combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, and therefore, a chance chance is established. In addition, even if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any other timing, the display mode constituting the chance eyes and reach eyes is not derived as the display result, and the chance eyes and reach eyes are finally obtained. Is not true.

  In addition, among the display results constituting these chance eyes, a stop operation is detected at a timing at which the “red 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, that is, at a timing at which one (2) cannot be won. Stop operation position (area number) in which the number of sliding symbols specifying “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is determined. Is larger than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) in which the number of sliding symbols for which the display result of “Red 7” stopping on any winning line is specified is 1 in the normal gaming state. In the case where only the sheet (2) is elected, a higher rate than the display result in which “red 7” constituting the combination of one sheet (2) stops on any winning line is derived, Chan Among the display results constituting the eyes, “Replay Watermelon Bell” and 15 to 17 of symbols 2 to 4 derived when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (2) cannot be won. The symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” will be derived.

  When the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won in the normal gaming state and no other combination is won, the item of BB (1) RB in FIG. The sliding frame number data corresponding to is selected. In this sliding frame number data, the number of sliding frames in which “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is specified for the region numbers 6 to 8 is determined. The number of sliding symbols for which the 10th symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” is specified is determined, and for the region number 17, the sliding symbols for 20, 21, and the 1st symbol “Replay Watermelon Bell” are specified. The number of sliding symbols for specifying the “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 12th to 14th symbols for the region number 16 is determined, and the “Replay The number of sliding symbols specifying “Blue 7 / Watermelon” is determined, and the number of sliding symbols specifying “Blue 7 / Watermelon / Blue 7” in the 16th to 18th symbols for the area numbers 18 and 19 is determined respectively. For other area numbers. Eye display result other than the display results and a display mode which constitutes a is the number of sliding frames specified are defined.

  Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6 to 8, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is derived as the display result, and finally on the winning line Since there will be no winning combination, a chance will be established. If the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 12 and 13, the symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are derived as the display result, and finally the big on the winning line If the combination of bonus (1) is not complete, no other combination will be lined up on the winning line, and the chance will be established. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 17, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is derived as a display result, and the winning combination is finally placed on the winning line. Since there is no match, chances will be established.

  In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 16, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 12 to 14 is derived as the display result, and at the timing of the area number 1, the left reel is When a stop operation is detected, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 20, 21, No. 1 is derived as a display result, and in any case, no winning combination is finally arranged on the winning line. Therefore, a reach that can appear only when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won is established, and if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 18, 16-18. The symbol “blue 7, watermelon, blue 7” is derived as a display result, and a reach that is common to all bonuses is established.

  When the big bonus (2) is won in the normal gaming state and no other combination is won, the slip corresponding to the item of BB (2) in FIG. Frame number data is selected. In this sliding frame number data, the sliding frame number for specifying the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols is determined for the region numbers 4 to 7, and 8 to 8 for the region numbers 12 to 14. The number of sliding symbols specifying “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 10th symbol is determined, and the number of sliding symbols specifying “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols for the area number 17 The number of sliding symbols for specifying “blue 7, watermelon, blue 7” of the symbols 16 to 18 for the region numbers 19 to 21 is determined. The number of sliding frames for specifying a display result other than the display result including the display mode that constitutes the reach eye is determined.

  Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the region numbers 4 to 7, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is derived as the display result, and the region numbers 12 to 14 When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of, the symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols is derived as the display result, and the winning combination is finally arranged on the winning line. Since there is no chance, a chance will be established. If a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area number 17, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is derived as a display result, and finally a big is displayed on the winning line. If the combination of bonus (2) is not complete, no other combination will be aligned on the winning line, so a chance will be established. In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 19 to 21, “blue 7 / watermelon / blue 7” of symbols 16 to 18 is derived as a display result and is common to all bonuses. The reach will be established.

  As described above, when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4, No. of No. 8-10 The sliding frame number data that can be specified as the display result of “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is selected as the sliding frame number data of the left reel. Yes.

  In addition, when only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one (1) cannot be awarded among the display results constituting the chance eye In addition, it is possible to specify “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols as the display result, and constitute one (1) combination “ The number of sliding frames that can identify “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as a display result when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol can be stopped on the winning line. The data is selected as the number of sliding frames for the left reel.

  In addition, when only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one (2) cannot be awarded among the display results constituting the chance eye In addition, it is possible to specify “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as display results, and constitute a combination of one sheet (2). The number of sliding frames that can be identified as the display result of “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols when the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the “Red 7” symbol can be stopped on the winning line. The data is selected as the number of sliding frames for the left reel.

  As a result, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and no other combination is won, or when only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, or in the normal gaming state In this case, when only one winning combination (2) is won, reel stop control is performed based on the sliding frame number data that can derive the chance. In particular, when only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, when the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (1) cannot be stopped on the winning line, 2-4 It is possible to derive “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the symbols and “Bell, Red 7 and Bell” of the symbols 8 to 10 as the display results, and “Blue 7” constituting a combination of one (1). When the symbol can be stopped on the winning line, it is possible to derive “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of No. 15 to 17 as the display result, and only one (2) in the normal gaming state. When winning, if the “Red 7” symbols that make up the combination of two (2) cannot be stopped on the winning line, the “Replay Watermelon Bell”, No. 2-4 symbols, The 17th pattern When “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” can be derived as a display result, and the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (2) can be stopped on the winning line, the 8th to 10th The symbol “bell / red 7 / bell” can be derived as a display result.

  In addition, when any of the roles is not won in the normal gaming state, the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols constituting the chance eye and the “bell / red 7 • bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols "Sliding frame number data that can specify a display result other than" Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon "of symbols 15 to 17 is selected as the sliding frame number data of the left reel. As a result, when any combination is not won in the normal gaming state, the reel stop control is performed based on the sliding frame number data that does not derive the chance.

  Also, if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, and in the normal gaming state In the case where only one (2) is elected, “Replay Watermelon” of symbols 2 to 4 constituting the chance eye when the stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6, 7, 12, 13・ "Bell" or 8-10 symbols "Bell, Red 7, Bell" are derived as display results, but if no role is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the area number 6, Even if a stop operation is detected at any of timings 7, 12, and 13, "Replay / Watermelon Bell" of symbols 2 to 4 or "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of symbols 8 to 10 are displayed as display results. Derived Rukoto is not. In other words, when the bonus or one (1) or one (2) is won, the display result constituting the chance eye is derived by performing the stop operation of the left reel at the timing described above. On the other hand, if no winning combination is won, even if the left reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  Next, the symbol arrangement in the left reel will be described with reference to FIG. Display modes (area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) that stop at either the middle or lower level, the combination of the big bonus (2) and the combination of one (1) number 16 and 18 The display mode (region numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20) in which the “Blue 7” symbol of the number stops at any of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel Each is arranged beyond the maximum drawing range of 4 frames.

  For this reason, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 9 to 13) in which the 9th “red 7” symbol can be drawn on up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line, You can draw the 16th “Blue 7” symbol up to 4 frames and stop it on any winning line, or you can draw the 18th “Blue 7” symbol up to 4 frames and stop it on any winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) that can be played, the “red 7” symbol of No. 9 is drawn up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line I can't do that either. In other words, the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Red 7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line, and the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line. The Big Bonus (1), Regular Bonus (1), 1 piece (in the position where the “Red 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line no matter what timing the stop operation is performed within the range that can be pulled up. Since the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of 2) and the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) and the combination of one (1) are respectively arranged, “red 7” "There is no stop operation position that can aim at the" blue 7 "symbol at the same time.

  In other words, the “Blue 7” symbol is on any winning line in the left reel sliding frame number data selected when the big bonus (2) or one (1) is won in the normal gaming state. It is selected when the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 in which the number of frames for drawing the display mode to be stopped are determined and the big bonus (1) or regular bonus, 1 (2) are won in the normal gaming state. In the left reel sliding frame number data, “Red 7” is different from the region numbers 9 to 15 in which the number of frames for drawing the display mode in which the “Red 7” symbol stops on any winning line is determined. There will be no stop operation position where the symbol and the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state, a display mode (No. 6 “cherry” symbols constituting a combination of cherries from which more medals are paid out than one (1) stops at any one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel. Area numbers 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) and the 16th or 18th “blue 7” symbols that make up a single (1) combination are on the upper, middle or lower level of the left reel. The display modes (area numbers 14 to 16, 15 to 17, 16 to 18, 17 to 19, and 18 to 20) to be stopped are arranged so as to exceed four frames that are the maximum drawing range.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 14, the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position (region numbers 6 to 12) where the 6th “cherry” symbol can be drawn up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line. If done, draw up to 4 frames of the 16th or 18th “Blue 7” design and stop it on one of the winning lines, or place the 16th or 18th “Blue 7” design up to 4 frames. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position (area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) that can be pulled in and stopped on any of the winning lines, the “Cherry” symbol of No. 6 is a maximum of 4 frames. It cannot be pulled in and stopped on any winning line. In other words, the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Cherry” symbol can be drawn on the winning line, and the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line. In the normal gaming state, more medals are paid out to a position where the “Cherry” symbol does not stop on the winning line no matter what timing within the range that can be withdrawn. Since the “Cherry” symbol No. 6 constituting the cherry combination and the “Blue 7” symbol constituting one (1) combination are arranged, the “Cherry” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol are arranged respectively. There is no stop operation position that can aim at the same time.

  In other words, in the number-of-slip frame data of the left reel that is selected when the cherry is won in the normal gaming state, the number of frames for drawing the display mode in which the “cherry” symbol stops on any winning line is determined. In the area numbers 6 to 12 and the number of slips on the left reel selected when one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, the “blue 7” symbol stops on any winning line Since the region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 in which the number of frames for drawing the display mode to be set are different, there is no stop operation position that can simultaneously aim at the “cherry” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol.

  On the other hand, the display pattern (area number 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) and chance chance that the 6th “cherry” symbol stops at the upper, middle or lower level of the left reel The “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are arranged within the maximum drawing range of 4 frames. Further, as shown in FIG. 14, a stop operation position (region numbers 6 to 12) in which the number of sliding symbols for drawing the 6th “cherry” symbol at the maximum 4 frames and stopping on any winning line is determined, and The number of sliding symbols to stop the “Replay Watermelon Bell” 2nd to 4th symbols and the 8th to 10th “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”, which constitutes a chance at the time of winning one (1), is determined. Since the stop operation positions (region numbers 4 to 8 and region numbers 10 to 14) partially overlap, the stop operation positions (region numbers 6 to 8 and region numbers 10 to 12) are stopped. If an operation is made, if the cherries are won, the 6th “cherry” symbol will stop on one of the winning lines, and if one is won (1), the chance will be configured "Replay watermelon bell" of No. 2-4, 8 ~ "Bell red 7 Bell" of the No. 0 pattern is to be stopped.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a continues to rotate the reels for which the stop operation has not yet been detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started. Then, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation is temporarily stopped due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  In this embodiment, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. However, the rotation of the reel is started. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop each reel. May be. In this case, since the reels are stopped without the player's operation, for example, even when any winning combination is won, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any winning combination.

  The CPU 41a according to the present embodiment performs an abnormal winning determination that determines whether or not a combination that is not permitted in the game is on the winning line when all the reels are stopped. When a combination that is not permitted in the game is arranged on the winning line, the game is controlled to an abnormal winning error state to disable the progress of the game. The abnormal winning error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated as in the case of the RAM abnormal error described above. It will not be released until it is set.

  The abnormal winning determination will be described. First, the CPU 41a sets a winning flag indicating a winning combination allowed in the game at the time of the internal lottery in the internal winning flag storing work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c, and all reels are set. A winning symbol flag that indicates a combination that is on the winning line at the time of stopping is set. Then, an abnormal winning determination flag is created from the winning flag, and it is determined whether or not there is an abnormal winning based on the generated abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag.

  The winning flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating a winning combination permitted in the game, and when the value of the bit individually determined for each winning combination is 1, This indicates that the winning of the winning combination is allowed. When the winning is 0, it indicates that the winning of the winning combination is not allowed.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, the 0th bit corresponds to the big bonus (1), the 1st bit corresponds to the big bonus (2), the 3rd bit corresponds to the regular bonus, the 11th bit corresponds to the replay, the 1st bit. 12 bits correspond to 1 (1), 13th bit corresponds to 1 (2), 14th bit corresponds to Bell, and 15th bit corresponds to Cherry. The third to tenth bits do not correspond to any combination.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of winning combinations may be permitted in one game. In this case, the value of each bit corresponding to the permitted winning combination is set to 1 in the winning flag. It has become.

  The abnormal winning determination flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating a winning combination permitted in the game, but the bit value individually determined for each winning combination is 0. In some cases, it indicates that the winning of the combination is permitted, and in the case of 1, it indicates that the winning of the combination is not permitted. That is, the abnormal winning determination flag is a value obtained by inverting 0 and 1 of the winning flag.

  The winning symbol flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating the winning combination on the winning line, and when the value of the bit individually determined for each winning is 1, Indicates that a winning has been won, and when it is 0, it indicates that the winning combination has not won. The winning symbol flag is the same as the internal winning flag. As shown in FIG. 16A, the 0th bit corresponds to the big bonus (1), the 1st bit corresponds to the big bonus (2), and the 3rd bit corresponds to the regular bonus. 10th bit corresponds to replay, 11th bit corresponds to JAC, 12th bit corresponds to 1 (1), 13th bit corresponds to 1 (2), 14th bit corresponds to Bell, 15th bit corresponds to Cherry Yes. The third to ninth bits do not correspond to any combination. By comparing the winning symbol flag and the winning flag, the CPU 41a performs an abnormal winning determination.

  The CPU 41a determines whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred by performing an AND operation on the abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag. Of the abnormal winning determination flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination allowed in the game is 0, and when this winning combination is won, that is, the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 1. However, even if no winning is made, that is, when the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 0, the result of the logical product operation is always 0. On the other hand, of the abnormal winning determination flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the combination that is not allowed in the game is 1, and when this combination does not win, that is, the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 0. In this case, the result of the logical product operation is 0. However, when the prize is won, that is, when the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 1, the result of the logical product operation is 1. For this reason, if even one unacceptable winning combination wins, the result of the logical product operation of the abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag becomes a value other than 0. In this case, the abnormal winning is determined. the it is.

  FIG. 16B is a diagram showing the flow of processing until the CPU 41a determines an abnormal prize paying attention to changes in register values.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, at the start of processing execution, the upper 8 bits of the winning flag are stored in the H register, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag are stored in the L register, and the B register is stored in the B register. Suppose that the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored, and the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, first, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag stored in the L register are stored in the A register. Further, all bits of the A register are inverted, and a logical product (AND) of the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag stored in the B register and the value of the A register is calculated, and the result is stored in the A register. To do. As a result, [all bit inversion value of internal winning flag (lower 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] is stored in the A register.

  This [all-bit inversion value of internal winning flag (lower 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] is when the winning specified by the winning symbol is a winning permitted by the internal winning flag [00H], otherwise, it is a value other than [00H] and it is determined that there is an abnormal winning. For example, as shown in FIG. 16B, of the lower 8 bits, the 0th bit of the internal winning flag is 1 {Big Bonus (1) Winning}, and the 0th bit of the winning symbol flag is 1 {Big Bonus (1 ) Winning}, [all bit inversion value of internal winning flag (lower 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] = [FEH AND 01H] is [00H]. On the other hand, if the 0th bit of the internal winning flag is 1 {Big Bonus (1) Winning} and the second bit of the winning design flag is 1 {Regular Bonus Winning}, all of the [Internal Winning Flag (Lower 8 Bits)] Bit inversion value AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] = [FEH AND 04H] is 04H, and it is determined that there is an abnormal winning.

  Similarly, by using the H register and the C register, for the upper 8 bits, the [all bit inversion value of the internal winning flag (upper 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (upper 8 bits)] is calculated and the result is calculated. Store in A register. If the A register is other than [00H], it is determined that the prize is abnormal.

  Next, error control associated with medal payout will be described. The CPU 41a performs control for driving out the hopper motor 34 and paying out medals in accordance with the winning of the small role and the settlement of credits (including medals used for setting the number of bets). At this time, if medals are continuously detected by the payout sensor 35 for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the medals are clogged, the driving of the hopper motor 34 is stopped, and the progress of the game is stopped by controlling to an error state. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 for a certain period of time despite the hopper motor 34 being driven, the hopper motor 34 is stopped once and the hopper motor 34 is restarted several times. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 even after the trial, it is determined as a hopper error (an error indicating a lack of medals in the hopper), and the progress of the game is stopped by controlling to an error state. The error states associated with these medal jamming errors and hopper errors are canceled by operating the reset switch 23 and the reset / setting switch 38, and control for paying out the remaining medals is performed.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into important work, general work, special work, set value work 1 to 3, non-saved work, unused area, and stack area.

  The important work is a work that stores data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time counter. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out during the big bonus. The special work is a work that stores data that is initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work 1 is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. The setting value newly set at the end of the setting (at the end of the setting change mode) is stored. The set value work 2 is a set value used when determining whether or not the set value read from the set value work 1 when the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process matches the set value stored at the end of the setting. Is stored, and the setting value newly set at the end of the setting (at the end of the setting change mode) is stored. The setting value work 3 is whether or not the setting value read from the setting value work 1 when the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process matches the setting value used when the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process of the previous game. This is a work for storing a setting value used when determining whether or not the setting value of the previous game is stored, and a setting value newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored When the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process for each game, the value is updated to the value read from the set value work 1. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is satisfied by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. However, the in-use stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 starts from the four at the end of one game when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed before the start of setting (before the transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, and at the start. When the initialization condition is satisfied, four types of initializations with different areas initialized according to each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed before the setting key switch 37 is turned on at the time of startup and shifts to the setting change mode. All areas except the middle stack area (including the unused area and the unused stack area) are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the big bonus. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is initialization that is performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, to initialize the storage area of the RAM 41c is to clear the data in the target area to 0, that is, to update the value of the target area to 0. The area data may be rewritten to a predetermined initial value.

  Next, an external output signal output from the slot machine 1 to an external device will be described. The CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 pays out in response to the occurrence of a regular bonus, an RB signal indicating the big bonus, a BB signal indicating the big bonus, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the bet number, and a winning. Output control for outputting a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals as an external output signal. As shown in FIG. 17, the game control board 40 can be connected to an external device via the external output board 110, and an external output signal output by the output control of the CPU 41a is connected to the external output board 110. Output to external devices.

  FIG. 18 is a timing chart showing the output status of the RB signal and BB signal when a big bonus occurs.

  When the big bonus occurs, the CPU 41a first starts outputting the BB signal (from OFF to ON). Next, during the big bonus that starts the output of the RB signal with the occurrence of the regular bonus (from OFF to ON), the transition to the regular bonus is repeated until the end condition is satisfied, so it is always controlled to the regular bonus. However, as shown in FIG. 18, when the regular bonus is once ended and the next regular bonus is started, the CPU 41a stops outputting the RB signal indicating the occurrence of the regular bonus to be ended ( When the output waiting time tw elapses, the output is started again (from OFF to ON). When the end condition of the big bonus is established and the regular bonus ends with this, the output of the RB signal is stopped (from the ON state to the OFF state), and then the output of the BB signal is also stopped (ON) To OFF state).

  Thus, when the regular bonus ends during the big bonus and the regular bonus starts again, the output of the RB signal is stopped for the output waiting time tw, and then the output is started again. It is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by the external device that has input the RB signal. Note that the output waiting time tw may be a time longer than the level at which it is possible to determine that the signal has been interrupted by the external device.

  Next, commands that the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 makes a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a command, a standby command, an abort command, an error command, a setting start command, and an initialization command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the winning flag and the type of the winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the game is started by operating the start switch 7.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The gaming state command is a command that can specify the gaming state of the next game (whether it is a normal gaming state, a big bonus, a regular bonus, etc.), and is transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and is transmitted when the transition to the standby state is made after a certain time has elapsed without setting the bet amount after the end of one game.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting is started, that is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  Each of these commands is generated in an activation process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a command queue provided in a special work in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 receives a command transmitted by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a refers to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b, and displays the liquid crystal display based on the control content registered in the control pattern table. The various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are controlled.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the CPU 91a receives a command, the CPU 91a receives among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. The control device corresponding to the type of the command is referred to, and the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and performs control corresponding to the newly received command. An effect based on the pattern is executed. In other words, even when the effect has not been completed to the end, when a new command is received, the effect that has been executed is canceled and the effect based on the new command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, the CPU 91a is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table also includes specific commands (reel stop command indicating automatic stop, winning determination command indicating occurrence of winning, payout start command, payout end, gaming state command indicating end of big bonus, standby command, stop Command, error command, setting start command, initialization command, etc.) are stored, and the CPU 91a is set in the game when receiving these specific commands. Regardless of the effect pattern being performed, a specific control pattern corresponding to the command is referred to, and the effect device is controlled based on the control pattern.

  When a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a winning is received, a winning effect pattern for executing a winning effect according to the type of winning is referred to as a control pattern. In particular, when a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a big bonus winning is received, a BB winning pattern for executing a BB winning effect peculiar to the big bonus winning is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a payout start command is received, a payout pattern for outputting payout sound effects is referred to as a control pattern. Further, when a payout end command is received during the output of the payout sound effect, the output of the payout sound effect is stopped. When a payout start command is received, unlike the other commands, the effect that is being executed is not executed and the effect corresponding to the received command is not executed. Sound effects are output. That is, other effects and effects accompanying payout are executed in parallel.

  When a gaming state command indicating the end of the big bonus is received, an ending pattern for executing an ending effect indicating the end of the big bonus is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a standby pattern for executing a standby effect is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described standby pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the standby effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning. As will be described later, the above-mentioned BB winning effect and ending effect are in the progress stage where the effect is dynamically executed and the state when the progress stage ends (for example, the final screen on the liquid crystal display 51). Is continuously displayed and the final stage sound effect is repeatedly output), and the BB winning effect and ending effect reach the final stage when an error occurs. In such a case, when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect and the ending effect are not executed from the elapsed stage, but return to the final stage.

  When the setting start command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the initialization command is received, the above-described standby pattern is referred to as the control pattern. That is, when the initialization command is received, the standby effect is executed.

  The CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 performs RAM parity adjustment so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0 each time the timer interrupt process (sub) that is periodically executed is executed. Data is calculated and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and is based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. It is designed to return to the production state before the interruption. Specifically, the control pattern executed last is referred to and control based on the control pattern is executed. As a result, an effect based on the control pattern executed before power interruption is executed from the beginning. If the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage at the time of power interruption, the BB winning effect or ending effect is not executed from the elapsed stage at the next start-up, but the final stage state. It will return to. Further, when the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of startup is not 0 (in the case of 1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized. It has become.

  Next, a description will be given of the relationship between the setting of bets and the settlement of credits (including medals used for setting bets) and effects. 19 to 28 are timing charts showing a period during which the setting of the bet number is allowed and a period during which the credit settlement is allowed.

  As shown in FIG. 19, while the game is not being executed, setting of the bet number and credit settlement are permitted. In this state, a medal is inserted or the bet number of credits is used. Settings are controlled to be possible. If a bet number can be set and a prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state is not set, the bet number is incremented by one each time a medal is detected. Further, if a prescribed number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, a credit is added by one each time a medal is detected. When the credit reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, the flow path of the inserted medal is switched to the medal payout exit 9 side, and the insertion of the medal is prohibited. . If the credits remain, the number of bets is set according to these switches by operating the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, and the amount is subtracted from the credits. Further, if the credits remain or the bet number is set, the operation of the settlement switch 10 is used to set the medal and the bet amount stored as credits by driving the hopper motor 34. The given amount of medals is paid out and returned to the player, and credits and bets are subtracted according to the medals paid out.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the setting of the bet amount and the credit settlement are permitted, and the game is started, the setting of the bet amount and the credit settlement are prohibited at that time. Specifically, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, the flow path of the inserted medal is switched to the medal payout exit 9 side, and the operation of the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the settlement switch 10 is invalidated. The time when the game is started is not the time when the rotation of the reel is started, but the time when the control stage is shifted by operating the start switch 7. This is because a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, and there is a case where a wait is applied. At this time, the start of reel rotation waits, but the game is started as a control stage.

  Thereafter, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When the display result is derived, it is determined that the game has ended, and when the end of the game is determined, the setting of the bet amount and the prohibition of credit settlement are lifted, and the setting of the bet amount and credit settlement are permitted. It becomes a state. As an exception, when a replay win occurs, the bet number is automatically set, so the setting of the bet number by the player's operation remains prohibited. In this state, Credit settlement is also prohibited.

  As a result of stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, if a winning with a medal payout has occurred, display results are derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as shown in FIG. At the time, the end of the game is not determined, and when the medal payout accompanying the occurrence of the winning is completed, the end of the game is determined, and at that time, the setting of the bet amount and the prohibition of the credit settlement are canceled, and the bet Number setting and credit settlement are permitted.

  Further, if the big bonus winning is generated as a result of the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R being stopped, as shown in FIG. 21, when the display results are derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, Is determined to be completed, and the CPU 91a executes the BB winning effect. The stage at the BB winning stage is composed of an elapsed stage and a final stage. First, when the stage shifts to the stage where the dynamic stage is executed over the stage time of the stage at the BB winning stage, the stage is completed. The process moves to the final stage where the state continues. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and this elapsed time is set longer than the period until the above-mentioned BB winning effect is reached at the final stage. The setting of the number of bets remains prohibited until the time effect stage waiting time is reached, and the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the stage waiting time for the BB winning effect. Thus, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, a period until the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect after the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred is determined. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. That is, the main control unit 41 backs up the counter value for timing the production waiting time of the BB winning effect at the time of power interruption, and at the next start-up, the BB winning effect effect is based on the backed up counter value. Since the waiting time is restarted, the time (Tb period in the figure) excluding the time (Ta period in the figure) that has already passed before the interruption from the production waiting time of the BB winning effect is restored when the interruption is restored. When the time has elapsed, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22, when a power interruption occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. Is done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when a power interruption occurs at the stage after the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and then returns, the BB winning effect returns to the final stage. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage (for example, a flag indicating that the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, or a BB winning effect) Only when the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. If it is backed up that the BB winning effect is in the final stage, the BB winning effect will return to the final stage. Regardless of whether the BB winning effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time. Thus, an effect corresponding to the BET command is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24, for example, in a period until the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect after the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred is determined. If a payment error occurs during the payment of credits and a payout error occurs during the payment of the medal associated with the payment, the time elapsed since the end of the game is determined to be an error. Resume from the state of time. That is, the main control unit 41 maintains the counter value for timing the production waiting time of the BB winning effect even during the error occurrence, and after canceling the error, the BB winning effect based on the maintained counter value. When the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tc in the figure) is removed when the payout error is canceled. When the period of (medium Td) elapses, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 24, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in an elapsed stage. It is executed from the beginning. On the other hand, although not particularly illustrated, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the BB winning effect has reached the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the BB winning effect is at the final stage as in the case of power interruption. It returns in the state of. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data only on whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of an error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It will return in the state of. Regardless of whether the BB winning effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time. Thus, an effect corresponding to the BET command is executed.

  In addition, in the game during the big bonus, as a result of the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R being stopped, the big bonus end condition is satisfied, that is, some wins occur and the total number of payouts during the big bonus exceeds 465 If the stop function is not set, as shown in FIG. 24, the end of the game is determined when the medal payout is completed, and the ending effect is executed by the CPU 91a. . The ending effect is composed of an elapsed stage and a final stage, as in the case of the BB winning effect. First, a transition is made to an elapsed stage in which a dynamic effect is executed over the effect time of the ending effect. When is finished, the process proceeds to the final stage where the state is continued. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and the elapsed time is set longer than the period until the ending effect reaches the final stage. The setting of the number of bets remains prohibited until the waiting time is reached, and the number of bets is set when the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the ending effect production waiting time. The prohibition is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, a period until the elapsed time measured by the CPU 41 a reaches the effect waiting time for the ending effect after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. In other words, the main control unit 41 backs up the counter value for timing the ending effect production waiting time at the time of power interruption, and at the next activation, measures the ending effect production waiting time based on the counter value that is backed up. Therefore, when power is restored, the bet is made when the time (Tb in the figure) excluding the time (Ta period in the figure) that has already passed before the power interruption from the waiting time for the ending effect has elapsed. The prohibition of the setting of the number is released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22, when a power interruption occurs in a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when a power interruption occurs at a stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect returns to the final stage. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the ending effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage (for example, after the flag or ending effect indicating that the ending effect has reached the final stage is executed). (Elapsed time) is backed up, and the next time it is activated, it is backed up that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage (for example, when the flag indicating that the ending effect has reached the final stage is set, or the ending effect) If the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage and the fact that the ending effect is in the final stage is backed up, the ending effect is It will return in the final stage. Regardless of whether the ending effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the BET command An effect corresponding to is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 24, in the period until the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined. For example, if a credit checkout is performed and a payout error occurs during the payout of medals accompanying this checkout, and the payout error is canceled, the elapsed time from when the end of the game is determined is counted. Resume from the state when the error occurred. That is, the main control unit 41 maintains the counter value for timing the ending effect stage waiting time even during the occurrence of an error, and after the error is released, the ending effect stage waiting time is based on the maintained counter value. Therefore, when the payout error is canceled, the time (Td period in the figure) excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tc in the figure) from the production waiting time of the ending effect is released. When the time has elapsed, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 24, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. The On the other hand, although not particularly shown, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect returns to the final stage as in the case of power interruption. To do. That is, the sub-control unit 91 maintains only data indicating whether the ending effect being executed is in the elapsed stage or the final stage when the error occurs, and when the error is canceled, the data indicating that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage If the ending effect is maintained, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage, and if the data indicating that the ending effect is in the final stage is maintained, the ending effect returns to the final stage state. Regardless of whether the ending effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the BET command An effect corresponding to is performed.

  Further, if the big bonus end condition is satisfied and the stop function is set, as shown in FIG. 25, the end of the game is determined when the medal payout ends. The above-mentioned ending effect is executed by the CPU 91a. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and the elapsed time is set longer than the period until the ending effect reaches the final stage. Since the stop state is controlled when the waiting time is reached, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated even when the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the rendering waiting time of the ending effect. Until the bet is set, the setting of the bet number remains prohibited. When the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated and the stop state is released, the setting of the bet number is also released. The bet number setting is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined, the elapsed time that is counted by the CPU 41a until the ending effect production waiting time is reached. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. That is, at the time of restoration of power interruption, after a time (period Tf in the figure) excluding time (period Te in the figure) that has already passed before the power interruption from the waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or reset / When the setting switch 38 is operated and the stop state is released, the bet number setting prohibition is also released, and the bet number setting is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26, when a power interruption occurs in a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, when a power interruption occurs at a stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect returns to the final stage. Regardless of whether the ending effect is an elapsed stage or a final stage, when a stop state occurs and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is Will be canceled and notification during stoppage will be executed. When the stop state is released in this state and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the stop notification is stopped and the standby effect is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 28, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, it is determined that the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time for the BB winning effect. For example, if a credit checkout is performed and a payout error occurs during the payout of medals accompanying this checkout, and the payout error is canceled, the elapsed time from when the end of the game is determined is counted. Resume from the state when the error occurred. That is, when the payout error is canceled, after the time (time period Tg in the figure) excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tg in the figure) from the rendering waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and when the batting state is released, the bet number setting prohibition is also released, and the bet number setting is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. The On the other hand, although not particularly shown, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect returns to the final stage as in the case of power interruption. To do. Regardless of whether the ending effect is an elapsed stage or a final stage, when a stop state occurs and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is Will be canceled and notification during stoppage will be executed. When the stop state is released in this state and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the stop notification is stopped and the standby effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, the end condition of the big bonus is that the total number of payouts in the big bonus exceeds 465. Therefore, in a game in which the end condition of the big bonus is satisfied, the medals must be paid out. When the payout ends, the end of the game is determined. For example, when applying that the big bonus reaches the specified number of games as an end condition, in the game where the end condition of the big bonus is satisfied In some cases, medals are not paid out. In such a case, the end of the game is determined when the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the CPU 41a performs a startup process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the main control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the CPU 41a is activated when the power is turned on and when the CPU 41a is activated due to a malfunction. This is a process to be performed.

  In the start-up process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa1), then the voltage drop signal detection data is acquired from the input port, and whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. That is, it is determined whether or not the voltage is stable (Sa2), and if the voltage drop signal is input, any processing is performed except for determining whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. There is no loop processing.

  If it is determined in step Sa2 that the voltage drop signal is not input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3), and the states of the stop switch 36 and the automatic settlement switch 29 are acquired. Validity / invalidity of the stop function and automatic settlement function is set in a specific register of the CPU 41a (Sa4). By the initialization of the I register and the IY register, the address of the interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and the reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa5), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sa6). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state in step Sa6, the RAM parity of all storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa7). Is determined (Sa8). If the power interruption interrupt processing is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa8, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. An error code indicating abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa8, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa9). If power interruption interrupt processing is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa9 (the data for destruction diagnosis is stored at the time of power interruption. Since the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the error code indicating the RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG.

  In the error processing, as shown in FIG. 30, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sb1), and the error code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb2). .

  Next, the error code stored in the register is confirmed, it is determined whether or not the error code is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error (Sb3), and if it is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error, After initialization 1 is performed to initialize all the storage areas except the used stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c (Sb4), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed.

  If it is determined in step Sb3 that the error code is not an error other than a RAM abnormality, it is determined whether an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sb5), and the reset / setting switch 38 is detected. If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected (Sb6). If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, the process returns to the step Sb4. That is, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is detected.

  When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step Sb5 or when the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step Sb6, the error code stored in the register is cleared (Sb7 ), The display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the display state saved in the stack in the step Sb1 (Sb8), and the process returns to the original process.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is other than the RAM abnormality error, the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated to return to the original processing even if the error state is canceled. In the case of error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the error state is not canceled even if the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated.

  Returning to FIG. 29, if it is determined in step Sa9 that the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the non-saved work, the unused area, and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are initialized. After performing initialization 3 (Sa11), the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa12). Next, each register is restored to the state before the power interruption, that is, the state saved in the stack (Sa13), the interrupt is permitted (Sa14), and the process that was executed last before the power interruption is returned.

  If the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state in the step of Sa6, after executing initialization 1 for initializing all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sa15), The value (0 at this time) stored in the set value work 1 is corrected to 1 (Sa16). Next, interruption is permitted (Sa17), and the setting change process shown in FIG. 31, that is, the setting change mode is entered (Sa18). After the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to the game process.

  In the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 31, the setting value stored in the setting value work 1 of the RAM 41c (the value of the setting value work 1 is corrected to 1 before shifting to the setting changing process. Is 1) (Sc1).

  Thereafter, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (Sc2, Sc3). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sc2, the setting value read in the step of Sc1. 1 is added (Sc4), and it is determined whether or not the set value after addition is 7, that is, whether or not the settable range is exceeded (Sc5). If the set value after addition is not 7, After returning to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3 again, if the setting value after addition is 7 in the step Sc5, the setting value is corrected to 1 (Sc6). ), The process returns to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3.

  When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in the step of Sc3, the changed set values selected at that time are stored in the set value works 1 to 3 of the RAM 41c, respectively, and the set values are confirmed. (Sc7) Wait until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (Sc8). If it is determined in step Sc8 that the setting key switch 37 is OFF, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 29 and the process proceeds to the game process.

  As described above, in the startup process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is stored in the RAM 41c by determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 and whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal. It is determined whether the stored data is normal. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the process proceeds to error processing. In the error processing due to the RAM abnormal error, an error code indicating the RAM abnormal error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, interrupts are not permitted. Therefore, once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and interrupts are permitted. Until it is interrupted, no power interruption processing is performed even if the power is interrupted. That is, the RAM adjustment data is not calculated and stored so that the RAM parity is newly set to 0 in the power interruption interrupt process, and the destruction diagnosis data is not newly set. Even if the game is started, the game cannot be resumed even if the CPU 41a is restarted except when the setting key switch 37 is turned on.

  Once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the setting key switch 37 is activated in the ON state, and after all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, a setting change process is performed. The game cannot be progressed until a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. In other words, in the state where the error processing due to the RAM abnormality error is started, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is resumed on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. It becomes possible to make it.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are sequentially executed. When the end-time process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where the bet number can be set, sets a predetermined number of bets according to the gaming state, and executes a process of determining the bet number when the start switch 7 is operated. To do.

  In the internal lottery process in step Sd2, a random number for internal lottery is extracted simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in step Sd1, and the winning of each above-described combination is permitted based on the extracted random number value. Process to determine whether or not. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

  In the reel rotation process in the step of Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the operation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R detected by the player are detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed.

  In the winning determination process in the step Sd4, when it is determined in the step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the payout process in step Sd5, when it is determined that a prize is generated in step Sd4, processing such as addition of credits and payout of medals is performed based on the number of payouts according to the win.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed.

  33 and 34 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the BET process executed by the CPU 41a in the step Sd1.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se1), and the specified number according to the gaming state (the specified number of betting numbers determined according to the gaming state. In the regular bonus, 1 is set. In the normal gaming state, 3 is set.) Is set in the RAM 41c (Se2), and a replay game flag indicating that the game is a replay game is set in the RAM 41c. Whether or not the game is a replay game is determined based on whether or not it is played (Se3).

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is a replay game, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (Se4), the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the BET counter is It is determined whether or not the number is a specified number (Se5). If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the process returns to the step of Se4, and if the value of the BET counter is the specified number, a insertion prohibition flag indicating that a medal cannot be inserted is set. The RAM 41c is set (Se6), and the process proceeds to the Se8 step.

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is not a replay game, settings before waiting to be made are performed (Se7), and the process proceeds to step Se8. In the setting before waiting for input, the input disable flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared, and the detection of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the settlement switch 10 is validated.

  In step Se8, it is determined whether or not a medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM 41c. When it is determined in step Se8 that the medal can be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal can be inserted using the medal flow path as a path on the hopper tank side. If it is determined that the medal can not be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the off state, and the medal flow path is the path on the medal payout exit 9 side. As a result, the insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se10), and the process proceeds to Step Se11.

  In step Se11, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensor 31 has detected passage of the inserted medal. If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected in the step of Se11, the process proceeds to the step of Se18. If the passage of the inserted medal is detected, the insertion of the medal is performed based on whether or not the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is possible to enter the token (Se12). If the medal cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to Step Se18.

  If the medal can be inserted in the step of Se12, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to determine whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (Se13). If the value is not the specified number, 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se14), and the process returns to the Se8 step.

  If the value of the BET counter is a prescribed number in the step of Se13, 1 is added to the value of the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 41c (Se15), and whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50 which is the upper limit value. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the credit counter is 50, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c (Se17), and the process returns to the step of Se8. .

  In step Se18, it is determined whether an operation of the start switch 7 is detected. If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected in the step of Se18, the process proceeds to the step of Se22. If the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se19).

  If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number in the step of Se19, the process returns to the step of Se8, and if the value of the BET counter is a specified number, the input impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c and the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off. The state is set, a medal flow path is used as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side, and insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se20), and a setting at the start of the game is performed (Se21). In the setting at the start of the game, detection of operations of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 is invalidated. Then, after the step of Se21, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. Along with this, setting of bets based on the insertion of medals, detection of the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is prohibited, and the adjustment of credits based on the detection of the operation of the adjustment switch 10 is prohibited. It becomes. Note that the insertion impossible flag is not cleared until the BET process of the next game, and the detection of the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 is not cleared until the BET process of the next game. The bet number setting is prohibited until the BET process. In addition, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not cleared until the next game BET processing except when the big bonus is won or the big bonus is ended. (Including medals used for setting) are prohibited. When the big bonus is won or the big bonus is over, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is effective when the game is finished (when the reel is stopped or when the medal payout is finished) without waiting for the BET process of the next game. Credits can be settled.

  In the step of Se22, it is determined whether or not an operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected. If the operation of the single BET switch 5 is not detected in the step of Se22, the process proceeds to the step of Se27, and if the operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (Se23). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se23, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se24). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to the Se8 step. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se24, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se25), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se26), and the process returns to the step of Se8.

  In step Se27, it is determined whether or not an operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in the step of Se27, the process proceeds to the step of Se32, and if the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se28). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se28, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se29). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to the Se8 step. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se29, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se30), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se31), and the process returns to the step of Se28.

  In the step of Se32, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Se32, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the operation is based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se33). If the game is a replay game, the process returns to step Se8. If the game is not a replay game in the step of Se33, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Se34). If the value of the BET counter is 0, the process proceeds to the step of Se36, and the value of the BET counter is 0. Otherwise, a bet amount settlement flag indicating that the already set bet amount is to be settled is set in the RAM 41c (Se35), and the process proceeds to the step of Se36. In step Se36, the hopper motor 34 is driven to pay out medals corresponding to the value stored in the credit counter or BET counter, that is, medals stored as credits or medals used for setting the number of bets. Checkout process is performed to control the return. Then, after the settlement process in the step of Se36, the input impossible flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se37), and the process returns to the step of Se8.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the settlement process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the settlement process, first, it is determined whether or not the medals used for setting the bet amount are settled based on whether or not the bet amount settlement flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sf1).

  If the medal used for setting the bet amount in the step of Sf1 is not settled, it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Sf2). If the value of the credit counter is 0, the settlement process is terminated. Then, the process returns to the original process.

  If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Sf2, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side. Insertion is prohibited (Sf3), and one medal payout process for performing payout control of one medal is performed (Sf4).

  In the medal payout process in step Sf4, if the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is not on, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to on. Then, the detection state of the payout sensor 35 is monitored, and when the payout sensor 35 detects the payout of one medal, it is determined that the medal is paid out, and the process proceeds to the next process. Further, when medals are continuously detected by the payout sensor 35 for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the medals are jammed, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off, and an error code indicating a medal jammed error is set in the register. Then, the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 for a certain period of time, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is once turned off, and no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 even if the driving of the hopper motor 34 is retried several times. In this case, after an error code indicating a hopper error (an error indicating a lack of medals in the hopper) is set in the register, the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG. The error processing due to the medal jamming error or the hopper error is canceled by operating the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38, and after the cancellation, the processing returns to the top of the single medal payout processing.

  When one medal is paid out by the medal payout process in step Sf4, the value of the credit counter is decremented by 1 (Sf5), and it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Sf6). If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in step Sf6, the process returns to step Sf4. If the value of the credit counter is 0, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off and the driving is stopped. Later (Sf7), the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  If it is the settlement of medals used for setting the number of bets in the step of Sf1, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set to the medal payout exit. As a route on the 9th side, the insertion of medals is prohibited (Sf3), and the same medal payout process as in step Sf4 is performed (Sf9).

  When one medal is paid out by the medal payout process in step Sf9, the value of the BET counter is decremented by 1 (Sf10), and it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Sf11). If the value of the BET counter is not 0 in the step of Sf11, the process returns to the step of Sf9. If the value of the BET counter is 0, the betting number settlement flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sf12). After the drive state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off and the drive is stopped (Sf7), the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd2.

  In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, the number of inserted medals, that is, the value of the BET counter, the prescribed number that is a predetermined number of inserted medals according to the game state of the game, and the values of the set value works 1 to 3 are calculated. Read (Sg1) and proceed to Sg2. The prescribed number is 3 in the normal gaming state and 1 in the regular bonus gaming state.

  In step Sg2, it is determined whether or not the number of inserted medals read in step Sg1 is a prescribed number. If the number of inserted medals is a prescribed number, the process proceeds to step Sg4. Proceed to step Sg3.

  In the step of Sg3, the inserted medal number is not the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, and the data stored in the RAM 41c may not be normal. Therefore, an error code indicating the RAM abnormality is stored in the register, and FIG. Move on to error processing shown in.

  In the step of Sg4, a setting for determining whether or not the setting value used for the lottery based on the values of the setting value workpieces 1 to 3 read in the step of Sg1, that is, the setting value stored in the setting value workpiece 1 is appropriate. Perform value judgment processing.

  In the set value determination process, as shown in FIG. 37, a set value determination process 1 (Sg51), a set value determination process 2 (Sg52), and a set value determination process 3 (Sg53) are sequentially executed.

  In the set value determination process 1 in the step of Sg51, as shown in FIG. 38, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game is appropriate. It is determined whether or not the value is within the range (Sg61). If the value read from the set value work 1 is not within the range of 1 to 6, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg62). If the value read from the set value work 1 is a value in the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to the set value determination process 2 in step Sg52.

  In the set value determination process 2 in the step of Sg52, as shown in FIG. 39, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 2 match, that is, the current game. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery matches the set value set at the previous setting change (Sg71), and the value read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 2 If the values do not match, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg72), the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. 30, and the values read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 2 If the value matches, the process proceeds to the set value determination process 3 in step Sg53.

  In the set value determination process 3 in the step of Sg53, as shown in FIG. 40, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match, that is, the current game. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game (Sg81), and the value read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 3 If the value does not match, the error code indicating the RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg82), the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. 30, and the value read from the set value work 1 and the set value work 3 If the read value matches, the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the setting value determination process, whether or not the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game is within an appropriate range, whether the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the previous setting change are set. By determining whether or not the set value matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game, respectively. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery of the game is an appropriate value, and if it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate value in at least one of the determinations, the above-described RAM abnormality error In the same manner as when the data in the RAM 41c is determined not to be normal at the time of startup, an error state due to a RAM abnormality error occurs, and the progress of the game is disabled. It has become as to be.

  In step Sg5, random number acquisition processing for acquiring a random number used in the game is performed, and the process proceeds to step Sg6. In the random number acquisition process, a sampling command is output to the sampling circuit 43, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 is latched, and the latched random number value is input from the I / O port 41d and extracted. A predetermined logical operation is performed on the extracted random number, and the result is obtained as a random number.

  In the step of Sg6, in the gaming state indicated by the state number, the hand number to be drawn first is stored in the RAM 41c, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg7. In the step of Sg6, when the state number is 0, that is, when any special combination is not carried over in the normal gaming state, 1 (big bonus (1)) is first set as the combination number to be drawn. When the state number is 1, that is, when any special combination is carried over in the normal game state, 10 (replay) is first set as the combination number to be drawn, and the state number is 2. That is, in the case of a regular bonus, 11 (cherry) is first set as the winning number to be drawn.

  In the step of Sg7, it is confirmed whether or not the lot number to be drawn is 15, that is, whether or not all the lots to be drawn are finished. If it is 15, all the lots to be drawn. If the lottery for the combination is finished, the process proceeds to step Sg8. If not 15, the process proceeds to step Sg9.

  In step Sg8, the general combination storing work in which the general combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In step Sg9, it is checked whether or not the common flag registered in the role-specific table in FIG. 4B is 1 in association with the role number to be processed. If not 1, the process proceeds to step Sg11.

  In step Sg10, the address (see FIG. 5) of the storage area for the number of determination values in the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table in FIG. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg12.

  In the step of Sg11, first, the setting value stored in the RAM 41c is read, and further, the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table in FIG. 4B in association with the processing target role number and the read setting value. Read the address of the storage area for the number of judgment values. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg12.

  In the step of Sg12, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sg10 or Sg11 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of the addition is set as a new random number value. It is determined whether an overflow has occurred when added to the random number value. The occurrence of an overflow indicates that the winning combination corresponding to the processing target winning number has been won. If an overflow occurs, the process proceeds to step Sg15. If no overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step Sg14.

  In step Sg14, 1 is added to the role number to be processed, and the process returns to step Sg7.

  In the step of Sg15, it is confirmed whether or not the role number is 1-9, that is, whether it is a role number indicating a special role or a combination of roles including a special role. If the role number is 1-9, the step of Sg16 If the combination number is not 1 to 9, the process proceeds to step Sg17.

  In step Sg16, a special combination winning flag corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set in the special combination storing work in which the special combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c. In the step Sg17, the general combination storing work in the RAM 41c. In addition, the winning flag of the general combination corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. In the step of Sg17, when the combination numbers are 1 to 3, since the general combination is not won, the general combination storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared in this case.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the reel rotation process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd3.

  In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (about 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (Si1), and the wait time must have elapsed. For example, it waits until the wait time elapses.

  If the wait time has elapsed in the Si1 step, a new wait time is set (Si2).

  Next, the setting at the start of the rotation of the reel motor is performed, and the rotation of the reel is started (Si3). Then, a sliding frame number setting process for setting the number of sliding frames of the virtual sliding frame table for each rotating reel is performed (Si4), and a setting at the time of completion of stop preparation is performed (Si5). As a result, the stop operation can be validated, and then the stop operation becomes valid when a constant-speed rotation of the reel is detected in the processing at the time of passing through the origin of a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not an operation of any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R is detected (Si6). If no operation of any stop switch is detected, a reel rotation error (over a certain period of time). Then, it is determined whether or not an error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 (Si7). If no reel rotation error has occurred, an insertion error (medal insertion) is further performed. Whether or not a medal insertion was detected during a period other than the permitted period, and whether or not a payout error (medal payout was detected during a period other than the permitted period) It is determined whether or not an error has occurred (Si8, Si9), and any error occurs in steps Si7 to Si9. If it is not determined, the flow returns to step Si6.

  Further, when it is determined that a loading error has occurred in the Si8 step, or when a dispensing error is determined in the Si9 step, an error code indicating a loading / dispensing error during reel rotation is set in the register (Si10 ), And shifts to the error processing shown in FIG. 30 (Si11). When the error is released, the process returns to the Si6 step again.

  If it is determined in step Si7 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating a reel rotation error is set in the register (Si12), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 30 (Si13). Along with this, the rotation of the reels is also temporarily stopped. When the error is released, the process returns to the Si3 step again and the reel rotation is resumed.

  If any stop switch operation is detected in the Si6 step, the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) in the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch is calculated. After obtaining and setting the workpiece corresponding to the stop reel (Si14), the process waits until the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation stops (Si15).

  When the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop operation stops, it is determined whether or not all the reels have stopped (Si16). If all the reels have not stopped, the process returns to the Si4 step, and all the reels are If it has stopped, the reel rotation process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, in the reel rotation processing, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected is continued until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Then, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation is temporarily stopped due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the sliding frame number setting process executed by the CPU 41a in the step of Si4.

  First, in the sliding frame number setting process, it is determined whether the result of the internal lottery is bell, replay, bonus + replay in the step of Si101, and if it is a result other than bell, replay, bonus + replay, The process proceeds to the step of Si102, and if any of bell, replay, bonus + replay, the process proceeds to the step of Si105.

  In step Si102, the table index is referred to, the sliding frame number data of the stop control table corresponding to the result of the internal lottery (stopped position of the stopped reel) is selected, and the selected sliding frame number data is expanded to be virtual. After performing the sliding frame number data expansion processing for storing the number of sliding frames in the sliding frame table, the process proceeds to step Si103.

  In the step of Si103, it is determined whether or not the result of the internal lottery is a bonus + small combination, and if it is a result other than the bonus + small combination, the slip frame number setting process is terminated as it is, and the flow returns to the flowchart of FIG. If it is a bonus + small combination, the process proceeds to step Si104.

  In the step of Si104, for each stop operation position, the stop position for each number of sliding frames is searched, and the priority of the searched stopping position and the priority of the stopping position based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table If the priority of the searched stop position is higher, after performing the sliding frame number updating process for updating the sliding frame number of the virtual sliding frame table, the sliding frame number setting process is terminated, Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  Further, in the step of Si105, for each stop operation position, the stop position where the winning combination is aligned on the winning line is searched from the stop positions based on the number of sliding frames of 0 to 4, and the number of sliding frames that become the stop position acquired by the search is determined. After the stop position search process stored in the virtual sliding frame table is performed, the sliding frame number setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the sliding frame number update process executed by the CPU 41a in the step of Si104.

  First, in the sliding frame number update process, a reel to be processed is set in the step of Si201. That is, among the rotating reels, a reel that has not been processed yet is set as a target reel, and the process proceeds to step Si202.

  In step Si202, the stop operation position pointer indicating the stop operation position to be processed is set to 1, and in step Si203, the slip frame number pointer indicating the number of slip frames to be processed is set to 0. , Go to the step of Si204.

  In the step of Si204, the stop position at which the stop is stopped at the number of sliding frames indicated by the sliding frame number pointer is obtained using the area number indicated by the stopping operation position pointer as the stopping operation position, and the process proceeds to the step of Si205 to become the acquired stopping position. In this case, a virtual winning determination is made to determine whether or not an illegal winning occurs, and the process proceeds to step S206 to determine whether or not the illegal winning is a result of the virtual winning determination.

  If it is not an illegal winning in the step of Si206, the process proceeds to the step of Si207, and further prohibition position determination is performed to determine whether or not the stop prohibition position is reached, and the process proceeds to step of Si208. It is determined whether or not.

  If it is not the stop prohibition position in the step of Si208, the process proceeds to the step of Si210, and if it is determined that the illegal winning is determined in the step of Si206, or if it is determined that the stop prohibition position is determined in the step of Si208, the step of Si209 is performed. The stop prohibition position flag indicating the stop prohibition position corresponding to the area number of the corresponding stop operation position (area number indicated by the stop operation position pointer) and the number of sliding frames (the number of sliding frames indicated by the sliding frame number pointer) is set. After setting, go to the step of Si210.

  In the step of Si210, the sliding frame number pointer is advanced by 1 and the processing proceeds to the step of Si211 to determine whether or not the sliding frame number pointer is 5. If the sliding frame number pointer is not 5, the flow returns to the step of Si204. If the sliding frame number pointer is 5, that is, if it is determined that all the sliding frame numbers 0 to 4 have been determined, the process proceeds to step Si212.

  In the step of Si212, the sliding symbols stored corresponding to the corresponding stop operation position (area number indicated by the stop operation position pointer) of the corresponding reel (reel set as the target reel) in the virtual sliding frame number table. The priority of the stop position based on the number and the priority of the stop position acquired according to the number of sliding frames of 0 to 4 according to the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame number table (FIG. 12A) In the order shown in FIG.

  In the step of Si213, whether or not the priority of the stop position acquired for each number of sliding frames as the comparison result of Si212 is higher than the priority of the stopping position based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame number table. If it is not higher than the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame number table (including the case where the priority is the same), the process proceeds to step Si216 and stored in the virtual sliding frame number table. If it is higher than the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding symbols, the process proceeds to step Si214.

  In the step of Si214, whether or not the stop position determined to have a higher priority in the step of Si213 is a stop prohibition position, that is, whether or not a stop prohibition position flag is set for the number of sliding frames at the stop position. If it is the stop prohibition position, the process proceeds to step Si216, and if it is not the stop prohibition position, the process proceeds to step Si215.

  In the step of Si 215, the sliding symbols stored corresponding to the corresponding stop operation position (area number indicated by the stop operation position pointer) of the corresponding reel (reel set as the target reel) in the virtual sliding frame number table. The number is updated to the number of sliding frames at the stop position determined to have a higher priority than that, and the process proceeds to step Si217.

  In the step of Si216, it is determined whether or not the comparison is made for the stop positions acquired for every number of sliding frames from 0 to 4, and the comparison is finished for the stopping positions acquired for all numbers of sliding frames from 0 to 4. For example, the process proceeds to step Si217, and if the comparison has not been completed for the stop positions acquired for all the sliding frame numbers 0 to 4, the process returns to step Si212.

  In the Si217 step, the stop operation position pointer is advanced by 1 and the process proceeds to the Si218 step to determine whether or not the stop operation position pointer is 22. If the stop operation position pointer is not 22, the process returns to the Si203 step. If the stop operation position pointer is 22, that is, if it is determined that all the region numbers 1 to 21 have been determined, the process proceeds to step Si219.

  In step S219, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed rotating reel. If there is an unprocessed rotating reel, the process returns to step Si201. If there is no unprocessed rotating reel, the number of sliding frames is updated. Is finished, and the flow returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the control content of the stop position search process executed by the CPU 41a in the steps of Si107 and Si112.

  First, in the stop position search process, a reel to be processed is set in step Si301. That is, among the rotating reels, a reel that has not yet been processed is set as a target reel, and the process proceeds to step Si302.

  In step Si302, the stop operation position pointer indicating the stop operation position to be processed is set to 1, and the flow proceeds to step Si303 to set the slip frame number pointer indicating the number of slide frames to be processed to 0. , Go to the step of Si304.

  In the step of Si304, the stop number at which the stop is stopped at the number of sliding frames indicated by the sliding frame number pointer is acquired using the area number indicated by the stopping operation position pointer as the stopping operation position, and the process proceeds to the step of Si305 to become the acquired stop position. In this case, a virtual winning determination is made to determine whether or not an illegal winning occurs, and the process proceeds to step S306 to determine whether or not the illegal winning is a result of the virtual winning determination.

  If it is not an illegal winning in the step of Si306, the process proceeds to the step of Si307, and further prohibition position determination for determining whether or not the stop prohibition position is performed is performed. It is determined whether or not.

  If it is not the stop prohibition position in the step of Si308, the process proceeds to the step of Si310, and if it is determined that the illegal winning is obtained in the step of Si306, or if it is determined that the stop prohibition position is determined in the step of Si308, the step of Si309 is performed. The stop prohibition position flag indicating the stop prohibition position corresponding to the area number of the corresponding stop operation position (area number indicated by the stop operation position pointer) and the number of sliding frames (the number of sliding frames indicated by the sliding frame number pointer) is set. After setting, go to the step of Si310.

  In the step of Si310, the sliding frame number pointer is advanced by 1 and the processing proceeds to the step of Si311 to determine whether or not the sliding frame number pointer is 5. If the sliding frame number pointer is not 5, the flow returns to the step of Si304. If the sliding frame number pointer is 5, that is, if it is determined that all the sliding frame numbers 0 to 4 have been determined, the process proceeds to step S312.

  In the step of Si 312, the number of sliding frames in the order corresponding to the winning combination (4, 3, 2, 1, 0 for Bell, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 for Replay) Another stop position is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Si313. When the acquired stop position is reached, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is aligned on the winning line.

  If the winning combination is not aligned on the winning line in the Si313 step, the process proceeds to the Si315 step. If it is determined that the winning combination is aligned on the winning line, the process proceeds to the Si314 step.

  In the step of Si314, it is further determined whether or not the stop position acquired in Si312 is a stop prohibition position, that is, whether or not a stop prohibition position flag is set for the number of sliding frames at the stop position. If it is, the process proceeds to the step of Si315, and if it is not the stop prohibition position, the process proceeds to the step of Si316.

  In the step of Si315, it is determined whether or not the determination is made for the stop positions acquired for all the number of sliding frames of 0 to 4, and the determination is finished for the stop positions acquired for all of the number of sliding frames of 0 to 4. For example, the process proceeds to the step of Si316, and if the determination is not completed for the stop positions acquired for all the sliding frame numbers 0 to 4, the process returns to the step of Si312.

  In the step of Si316, last in the step of Si312 corresponding to the corresponding stop operation position (area number indicated by the stop operation position pointer) of the corresponding reel (reel set as the target reel) in the virtual sliding frame number table. The acquired number of sliding frames at the stop position is stored, and the process proceeds to step Si317. In addition, when the number of sliding symbols that become the stop position acquired last is the stop prohibiting position, the number of sliding symbols that are not the stopping prohibition position among the number of sliding symbols that become the stopping position acquired before that is stored. .

  In the Si317 step, the stop operation position pointer is advanced by 1 and the process proceeds to the Si318 step to determine whether or not the stop operation position pointer is 22. If the stop operation position pointer is not 22, the process returns to the Si303 step. If the stop operation position pointer is 22, that is, if it is determined that all the region numbers 1 to 21 have been determined, the process proceeds to step Si319.

  In step Si319, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed rotating reel. If there is an unprocessed rotating reel, the process returns to step Si301. If there is no unprocessed rotating reel, stop position search processing is performed. Upon completion, the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning determination process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd4.

  The winning determination process in this embodiment is mainly composed of three processes. The first process is a process of setting a winning symbol flag based on the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R derived and displayed in the game. The second process is a process of determining an abnormal winning based on the winning flag and the winning symbol flag. The third process is a process at the time of winning based on the winning symbol flag.

  The step of Sj1 is a process of setting a winning symbol flag based on the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R derived and displayed in the game.

  The CPU 41a first performs a winning symbol determination process (Sj1), and proceeds to step Sj2. In the winning symbol determination process, the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the B register, and the lower eight bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register. The E register stores the number of payout medals.

  As described above, in step Sj1, the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the B register, and the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register.

  The subsequent steps Sj2 to Sj10 and Sj17 are processes for determining an abnormal winning based on the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag.

  In step Sj2, the value of the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) (winning flag) is stored in the HL register, and in step Sj3, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag as the value of the L register are stored in the A register. In step Sj4, all bits of the A register are inverted. That is, each bit is inverted to 1 if it is 0, and is converted to 0 if it is 1, and converted to an abnormal winning determination flag, and the process proceeds to step Sj5.

  In the step of Sj5, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag which is the value of the C register and the logical product (AND) of the value of the A register are calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj6. If the A register is not 0, the process jumps to step Sj17, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step Sj7.

  In step Sj7, the upper 8 bits of the internal winning flag, which is the value of the H register, are stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to step Sj8 to invert all the bits in the A register. That is, each bit is inverted to 1 if it is 0, and is converted to 0 if it is 1 and converted into an abnormal winning determination flag, and the process proceeds to step Sj9.

  In the step of Sj9, the logical product (AND) of the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag which is the value of the B register and the value of the A register is calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj10. If the A register is not 0, the process jumps to step Sj17, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step Sj11.

  The step of Sj17 is a jump destination when it is determined in the steps of Sj6 and Sj10 that the A register is not 0, that is, when a prize other than the prize allowed in the game is won, and indicates an abnormal prize error. The error code is set in the register, and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  As described above, the abnormal winning is determined based on the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag by the steps Sj2 to Sj10 and Sj17.

  The subsequent steps Sj11 to Sj18 (excluding Sj17) are processes at the time of winning based on the winning symbol flag.

  In the step of Sj11, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag that is the value of the C register is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj12, and the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag that is the value of the B register and the A register The logical sum (OR) of the values is calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to step Sj13.

  In step Sj13, it is determined whether the A register is 0. If it is 0, that is, if no winning combination has been won, the process is terminated. If the winning combination is won, the process proceeds to step Sj14.

  In step Sj14, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag which is the value of the C register is inspected for the bit (sixth bit) corresponding to replay, and when the value is 0, that is, other than replay When the winning combination is won, 1 is set to the zero flag, and when the value is 1, that is, when the replay is won, 0 is set to the zero flag. The process proceeds to step Sj15 to determine whether the zero flag is 1. If it is 1, the process jumps to step Sj18, and if not, the process proceeds to step Sj16.

  In step Sj16, a process when a replay is won, such as setting a flag during replay game indicating a replay game, is performed, and the process ends.

  The step of Sj18 is a jump destination when it is confirmed in the step of Sj15 that a winning combination other than the replay has been won, and a process at the time of winning that is performed when a winning combination other than the replay such as calculation of the number of payouts is performed. Then, the process ends.

  As described above, according to the steps Sj2 to Sj10 and Sj17, the process at the time of winning based on the winning symbol flag is performed.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sj18.

  In the winning process, first, referring to the role-specific table shown in FIG. 4B, the game state (state number) of the game and the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the character indicated by the winning symbol flag are set (Sj21). , Go to step Sj22.

  In step Sj22, it is determined whether or not the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) has been won based on the winning symbol flag. If neither the big bonus (1) nor the big bonus (2) has been won. , Go to step Sj25. If the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) has been won, the big bonus medium flag indicating that the big bonus is being set is set in the RAM 41c, and the special role storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored) ( In step Sj23), the process proceeds to step Sj24, where the value of the big bonus payout counter in which the total payout of medals in the big bonus is stored in the RAM 41c is initialized (set to 0) (Sj24), and the process proceeds to step Sj25.

  In step Sj25, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus has been won based on the winning symbol flag. If the regular bonus is not won in step Sj25, the winning process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. If a regular bonus has been won in step Sj25, a regular bonus medium flag indicating that the regular bonus is in effect is set in the RAM 41c, and the special role storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored) (Sj26), and the regular bonus is set. After the value of the game counter and the value of the regular bonus winning counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus are stored are initialized (Sj27), the winning process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  47 and 48 are flowcharts showing the control details of the game end process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd6.

  In the game end process, first, it is determined whether or not a regular bonus is being performed in the step of Sk1. In step Sk1, if the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c and the RB signal is ON, it is determined that the regular bonus is in effect.

  If the regular bonus is not in the step of Sk1, the process proceeds to the step of Sk5. If the regular bonus is in the step of Sk1, the value of the regular bonus game number counter is decremented by 1, and if a winning has occurred, the value of the regular bonus medium winning counter is incremented by 1 (Sk2), and the regular bonus end condition Is determined, that is, whether the value of the regular bonus game number counter is 0 or the value of the regular bonus intermediate winning counter is 8 (Sk3). If the regular bonus end condition is not satisfied in the step of Sk3, the process proceeds to the step of Sk5. If the end condition of the regular bonus is satisfied, the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk4). ), Go to step Sk5.

  In step Sk5, it is determined whether or not a big bonus is in progress. In step Sk5, when the big bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c and the BB signal is ON, it is determined that the big bonus is being used.

  If the big bonus is not in the step in Sk5, the process proceeds to the step in Sk12. Is determined, that is, whether or not the value of the big bonus medium payout counter exceeds 465 (Sk7). If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in step Sk7, the process proceeds to step Sk9. If the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the big bonus medium flag and the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c are set. Clear (Sk8) and proceed to Step Sk12.

  In step Sk9, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is not set in the RAM 41c, that is, whether or not the big bonus is in effect and the regular bonus is not activated. If the regular bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk9, the process proceeds to the step of Sk12. If the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk9, the regular bonus indicating that the regular bonus is in progress. A regular bonus operation start flag indicating the operation start of the flag and the regular bonus is set in the RAM 41c (Sk10), and the value of the regular bonus game number counter and the value of the regular bonus intermediate winning counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus is stored are initialized. (Sk11), the process proceeds to step Sk12.

  In step Sk12, it is determined whether or not the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. If the RB signal is not ON in step Sk12, the process proceeds to step Sk16. If the RB signal is ON, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk17). ). When the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk17, that is, when the regular bonus is finished and the regular bonus is not resumed thereafter, the process proceeds to the step of Sk15. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sk13, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk14). When the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk14, that is, when the regular bonus is restarted during the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk15, and the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk14. If not, that is, if the regular bonus is not satisfied and the termination condition for the regular bonus is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sk16. In the step of Sk15, the RB signal is turned off and the process proceeds to the step of Sk16.

  In the step of Sk16, it is determined whether or not a regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus operation start flag is not set in the step of Sk16, the process proceeds to the step of Sk19. If the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk16, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game, Then, the regular bonus operation start flag in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk17), and the process waits until the output waiting time of the RB in-progress signal elapses (Sk18). When the output waiting time elapses, the process proceeds to the step Sk19.

  In step Sk19, it is determined whether or not the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk19, the process proceeds to the step of Sk25. If the big bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk19, whether the BB medium signal of the external output signals is in an ON state or not. Is determined (Sk20). When the BB signal is ON in the step of Sk20, that is, when the big bonus is being performed and the next game is not the start game of the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk25, and the BB is being processed in the step of Sk20 When the signal is not ON, that is, when the big bonus starts from the next game, the BB medium signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sk21), and the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect is stored in the register. After setting (Sk22) and enabling detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 (Sk23), an effect waiting process for waiting until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sk22 elapses is performed (Sk24). And after completion | finish of an effect waiting process, it progresses to the step of Sk25.

  In the effect waiting process, as shown in FIG. 49, the effect waiting time set in the register is set in the general-purpose time counter of the RAM 41c (Sm1), and it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sm2). If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected, the process proceeds to step Sm4. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the settlement process shown in FIG. 35 is performed (Sm3), and then the process proceeds to step Sm4. . In step Sm3, it is determined whether or not the production waiting time set in the general-purpose time counter has elapsed. If the production waiting time has not elapsed, the process returns to step Sm2, and if the production waiting time has elapsed. Then, the production waiting process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  In the step of Sk25, it is determined whether or not a regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus flag is not set in the step of Sk25, the process proceeds to the step of Sk28. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sk25, whether or not the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. Is determined (Sk26). When the RB signal is ON in the step of Sk26, that is, when the regular bonus is being performed and the next game is not the start game of the regular bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk28, and the RB is being processed in the step of Sk26. If the signal is not ON, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game, the RB signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sk27), and the process proceeds to step S28.

  In step Sk28, it is determined whether or not the BB signal in the external output signal is in an ON state. If the BB medium signal is not ON in the step of Sk28, the process proceeds to the step of Sk46. If the BB medium signal is in the ON state of the Sk28 step, it is determined whether or not the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. Determine (Sk29). When the big bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk29, that is, when the big bonus is not ended, the process proceeds to the step of Sk46, and when the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk29, that is, the big bonus Is finished, the BB signal in the external output signal is turned off (Sk30), the production waiting time of the ending effect is set in the register (Sk31), and the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is enabled. After (Sk32), an effect waiting process (see FIG. 49) is performed to wait until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sk31 elapses (Sk33). After completion of the effect waiting process in the step of Sk33, initialization 2 is performed to initialize the general work in addition to the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c (Sk34), and then the process proceeds to the step of Sk35.

  In the step of Sk35, it is determined whether or not the automatic settlement function is set to be valid. If the automatic settlement function is not set valid in the step of Sk35, the process proceeds to the step of Sk37. If the automatic settlement function is set to be valid in the step of Sk35, the settlement process shown in FIG. 35 is performed (Sk36), Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sk37.

  In step Sk37, it is determined whether or not the stop function is set to be valid. If the stop function is not set to be effective in the step of Sk37, the process proceeds to step of Sk46. If the stop function is set to be enabled in the step of Sk37, a stop code indicating the stop state is set in the register. Then, the stop code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sk39). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sk40). If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is further detected. (Sk41), if the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, it is further determined whether the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sk42), and if the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected. Return to the step of Sk40. If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sk40, or if the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step of Sk41, the operation proceeds to the step of Sk44, and the operation of the settlement switch 10 is performed in the step of Sk42. If detected, the settlement process shown in FIG. 35 is performed (Sk43), and the process returns to the step of Sk38.

  In step Sk44, the stop code stored in the register is cleared. And the display state of the game auxiliary | assistant display 12 is cleared (Sk45), and it progresses to the step of Sk46.

  In step Sk46, initialization 4 is performed to initialize the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c. Then, the game end process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the process at the end of the game, it is determined for each game whether or not the regular bonus is not activated during the big bonus. If the regular bonus is not activated during the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated. It is supposed to let you.

  Also, before determining whether or not the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied. If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in the determination, the regular bonus is It is determined whether or not the bonus is inactive. If the bonus is inactive, the regular bonus is activated.

  Further, when operating the regular bonus, the RB in-signal indicating that the regular bonus is in progress is waited until the output waiting time of the RB signal has elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed, Even if the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops, and when the output waiting time elapses in this state, the RB is started again. The signal output is resumed.

  In addition, during the period until the production waiting time of the BB winning effect and the ending effect elapses, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated. Control will be performed. Further, even in the stopped state, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated, and even when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected during this period, the credit settlement control is performed.

  50 and 51 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 3, that is, interrupting the start process or the game process at an interval of 0.56 ms. .

  In the timer interrupt process, interrupts are first prohibited (Sn1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process is prohibited. Then, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Sn2).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sn3). In the step of Sn3, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  Next, referring to the counter value for branching, it is determined whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sn4). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sn8 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sn23 described later is executed (Sn5).

  Next, referring to the branch counter value, it is determined whether it is 1 or not, that is, timer interrupt 2 (Sn6). If it is not timer interrupt 2, that is, if it is timer interrupt 1, then the reel motor Reel start processing (Sn7) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step processing (Sn8) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, the motor phase signal standby process (Sn9) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a predetermined time has been sequentially executed, and then the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20). The interrupt prohibited in the step is permitted (Sn21), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

  Further, in the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Sn6, LED dynamic display processing (Sn10) for dynamically lighting various indicators, control signal output processing for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to an output port, etc. (Sn11), random number update processing for updating various software random numbers (Sn12), time counter update processing for updating various time counters (Sn13), and command transmission for transmitting commands stored in the command queue to the effect control board 90 After the processing (Sn14) and the external output signal update processing (Sn15) for updating the external output signal are sequentially executed, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20), and the interrupt prohibited in the Sn1 step is permitted. (Sn21) and the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If the timer interrupt 3 or the timer interrupt 4 is found in the step of Sn4, it is further determined by referring to the branch counter value whether it is 3 or not, that is, the timer interrupt 4 (Sn16). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt 3, port input processing (Sn17) for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port, passing through the origin of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R (reel reference) (Passing position) is detected, the occurrence of a reel rotation error is detected, whether stop preparation is completed (stop preparation completion code is set), stop preparation is complete, and If it is rotating at high speed, the process at the time of passing through the origin (Sn18) that validates the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel, and these various scans based on the detection signals of various switches. After sequentially executing the switch input determination process (Sn19) for determining whether or not the switch satisfies the detection condition, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20), and the interrupts prohibited in the Sn1 step Is permitted (Sn21) and the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 in the Sn16 step, the stop reel work is detected when the stop operation position is stored in the stop reel work in accordance with the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R or the automatic stop control. The stop switch process (Sn22) that calculates the stop position after determining the stop position from the stop operation position stored in, and counts the number of steps until the stop calculated by the stop switch process. After the stop process (Sn23) for starting the brake by the two-phase excitation when it is time to start, and the final stop process (Sn24) for the three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start of the brake in the stop process, in Sn2, The register saved in the stack area is restored (Sn20), and the interrupts prohibited in the Sn1 step are permitted ( n21), returns to the interrupt before processing.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the stop switch process executed by the CPU 41a in the timer interrupt 4 of the timer interrupt process described above.

  In the stop switch process, first, for all reels in the order of left, middle, and right, whether or not a stop operation position is set for the work on the corresponding reel, that is, a stop operation has been detected or stopped by automatic stop. Is determined (Sp1, Sp2). If no stop operation has been detected for all the reels or if no stop has been instructed, the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  In addition, if any stop operation of the reel is detected in the step of Sp1 or if the stop of the reel is instructed, the process proceeds to the step of Sp3.

  In the step of Sp3, the virtual sliding frame table corresponding to the reel is referred to, and the region number serving as the stop position is specified from the region number including the step number of the stop operation position set for the work corresponding to the stop reel. Then, the process proceeds to the step of Sp4, the number of steps required to reach the stop position specified in the step of Sp3 is calculated from the number of steps from the current reel reference position, and after setting the calculated number of steps, the stop switch process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 53 shows the control contents of the interruption interrupt process executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interruption 2, that is, when the voltage drop signal from the interruption detection circuit 48 is input, interrupting the execution process or the game process. It is a flowchart which shows.

  In the power interruption interruption process, first, interruption is prohibited (Sq1). That is, other interrupt processing is prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt processing. Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sq2). Note that the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, but are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sq3). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not inputted, the register saved in the stack area in Sq2 is restored (Sq4), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sq1 is permitted (Sq5), and the processing before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step Sq3, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sq6), and all output ports are initialized (Sq7). . Next, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sq8), and access to the RAM 41c is performed. It is prohibited (Sq9).

  Then, except for the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sq10, where Sq10 is the same processing as Sq3), the processing enters a loop processing in which no processing is performed. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the CPU 41a reliably stops operation when the power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described startup processing is executed, and if the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the original processing is performed. It will return to.

  In this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 41c is prohibited, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process. However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the process proceeds to the start-up processing based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 49. You may make it do.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95 to the sub control unit 91, the CPU 91a performs a start-up process (sub) shown in FIG.

  In the startup process (sub), the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Ss1), and then access to the RAM 91c is permitted (Ss2). Then, the RAM parity of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Ss3), and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity is 0 (Ss4).

  If the data in the RAM 91c is normal, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is 0 in the step Ss4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is normal, and the process proceeds to the step Ss5. The production state before power interruption is restored. In step Ss5, it is determined whether or not the BB winning effect or the ending effect has been executed before the power interruption. If the BB winning effect or the ending effect has been executed, the BB winning effect or the ending effect is executed. Has reached the final stage (Ss6). If the final stage has been reached, a final-stage control pattern is set (Ss7), and then the liquid crystal display is set according to the set control pattern. The effect control process for controlling the various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED is executed (Ss9), the interruption is permitted (Ss10), and the process proceeds to the loop process.

  If the BB winning effect or ending effect has not been executed before the power interruption in step Ss5, or if the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage in step Ss6, After setting the last control pattern executed before disconnection (Ss8), the control of various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is performed according to the set control pattern. The effect control process to be performed is executed (Ss9), the interruption is permitted (Ss10), and the process proceeds to the loop process.

  If the RAM parity is not 0 in step Ss4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is not normal. After the RAM 91c is initialized (Ss11), the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (Ss12). In accordance with the set control pattern, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is executed (Ss9), and interruption is permitted (Ss10). ), Shift to loop processing.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (sub) executed by the CPU 91a at intervals of 1.12 ms based on the count of the internal clock.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), first, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the buffer (St1). If the command is not stored in the buffer, the process proceeds to step St6. If the command is stored in the buffer, the command is acquired from the buffer (St2), and the process proceeds to step St3.

  In the step of St3, when the received command is an internal winning command, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern for continuous effect is already set in the RAM 91c. If the effect pattern for continuous effect is not set, the ROM 91b is determined. An effect pattern is selected by referring to the effect table stored in the table, selecting an effect pattern at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and setting the selected effect pattern in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. The selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step St4.

  In step St4, processing corresponding to the received command is performed, and the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, and the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control registered corresponding to the received command are stored. A control pattern setting process for reading the pattern and setting it in the RAM 91c is executed, and the process proceeds to step St5.

  In the step of St5, in accordance with the control pattern set in the step of St5, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED is executed. Proceed to step.

  In the step of St6, after updating the values of various counters such as the random number counter of the RAM 91c, the process proceeds to the step of St7, and it is confirmed whether or not the content of data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of startup is normal. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c becomes zero so that the timer interrupt process (sub) is completed.

  That is, the CPU 91a does not set the RAM parity adjustment data when the power interruption is detected like the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, but the RAM parity adjustment data for each timer interrupt process (sub) that is periodically executed. Even if the power is cut off, it is possible to determine whether or not the content of data backed up in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of recovery.

  56 and 57 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the control pattern setting process executed by the CPU 91a in the step 4 of the timer interrupt process (sub).

  In the control pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a setting start command (Sy1). If the received command is a setting start command, the setting notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy1), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not a setting start command in step Sy1, it is determined whether the received command is an initialization command (Sy3). If the received command is an initialization command, all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized (Sy4), the above-mentioned standby pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy5), the control pattern setting process is terminated, Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not an initialization command in step Sy3, it is determined whether the received command is a standby command (Sy6). If the received command is a standby command, the standby pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy7), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step Sy6 that the received command is not a standby command, it is determined whether the received command is a stop command (Sy8). If the received command is a stop command, it is further determined whether or not it is a stop command indicating the start (occurrence) of a stop state (Sy9), and if it is a stop command indicating the start of the stop state. Then, the stop notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy10), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not a stop command indicating the start of the stop state, that is, if it is a stop command indicating the release of the stop state, the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (Sy7), and the control pattern setting process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step of Sy8, if the received command is not a stop command, it is determined whether or not the received command is an error command (Sy11). If the received command is an error command, it is further determined whether or not it is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state (Sy12). If the received command is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state, the currently set control pattern is determined. Are temporarily saved in the stack (Sy13), the error notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy14), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state, that is, if it is an error command indicating the release of the error state, the control pattern saved in the stack at the time of occurrence of the error, ie, Sy13 is set (Sy15). Then, the control pattern setting process ends, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step Sy11 that the received command is not an error command, it is determined whether the received command is a payout start command (Sy16). If the received command is a payout start command, the payout pattern is set as a sub-pattern (Sy17), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. The sub-pattern is a control pattern that is set in an area different from the area in which the control pattern of the effect that is being executed is set, and is executed when the effect is executed in parallel with the control pattern of the effect that is being executed. It is a control pattern that is set separately from the control pattern for the production. That is, normally, when a new control pattern is set, the control pattern that was originally set is overwritten, whereas the control pattern is set as a sub-pattern, so that Patterns are set at the same time. For this reason, when the payout pattern is set as the sub-pattern in the step of Sy17, an effect based on the payout pattern is executed concurrently with the effect currently being executed.

  If it is determined in step Sy16 that the received command is not a payout start command, it is determined whether the received command is a payout end command (Sy18). If the received command is a payout end command, the payout pattern set as the sub-pattern is cleared (Sy19), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, in the step of Sy19, only the effect based on the payout pattern that has been executed in parallel ends, and only the effect that was originally executed continues.

  If it is determined in step Sy18 that the received command is not a payout end command, it is determined whether the received command is a winning determination command (Sy20). If the received command is a winning determination command, it is determined whether or not the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning (Sy21). If the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning, the BB winning pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy22), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the winning determination command does not indicate a big bonus, it is further determined whether or not a winning other than the big bonus is indicated (Sy23). If the prize determination command indicates a prize other than the big bonus, it corresponds to the winning prize among the winning patterns for executing the winning effect in which a specific effect is executed when the winning occurs. The winning pattern to be set is set as a control pattern (Sy24), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If no win other than the big bonus is shown in the Sy23 step, the process proceeds to the Sy29 step.

  If the command received in step Sy20 is not a winning determination command, it is determined whether the received command is a gaming state command (Sy25). If the received command is not a gaming state command, the process proceeds to step Sy29. If the received command is a gaming state command, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is set in the RAM 91c (Sy26), and based on the set gaming state. It is then determined whether or not the game is a game for which a big bonus end condition is satisfied (Sy27). If the game is a game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the ending pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy28), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If the game is not a game for which the big bonus ending condition is satisfied in step Sy27, the process proceeds to step Sy29.

  In step Sy29, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control pattern registered corresponding to the received command are read and set, and the control pattern setting process is performed. Is finished, and the flow returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the table-type stop control and the control-type stop control are used in combination according to the result of the internal lottery. Since it is not necessary to prepare frame number data in advance, the storage capacity of the sliding frame number data can be reduced.

  If the result of the internal lottery is lost, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, stop control by table method is performed, Since the stop control by the control method is performed at the time of winning the bell and replay, the storage capacity of the sliding frame number data required at the time of winning the bell and replay can be greatly reduced. In other words, the display results can be varied according to the nature of the result of the internal lottery, and the storage capacity of the sliding frame number data can be reduced.

  Also, in this embodiment, the table system is used when winning the cherry, which has been missed depending on the timing of the stop operation, 1 (1), 1 (2), Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus Since the stop control is performed according to the above, it is possible to diversify the display results when the winning combination is won and the winning combination is lost.

  In particular, since the stop control is performed by the table method when winning the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), and regular bonus that can be expected to win many medals, the display result when these winning bonuses are missed (So-called reach eyes and chance eyes) can be diversified. In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the case where a bonus is won, in addition to the case where no role has been won, the table-type stop control is performed, so the display result in the case of a loss may be diversified. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the chance item (display result that can appear even when the bonus is won or not) is expanded. That is, since the stop position in the case of a loss can be limited by the number of sliding frames, it is easy to adjust the stop position that is a chance and the appearance ratio.

  In this embodiment, different sliding frame number data is applied when the bonus is won and when the player loses, but for example, the first stop is common when the bonus is won and when the player loses. The stop control may be performed using this, and in this way, when the display result is stopped on the first stop reel, it is possible to determine whether or not the bonus is won from the stop position. Since this is not possible, the player's expectation can be sustained thereafter.

  In addition, when winning a bell or replay that does not miss, there is little relation to the display result (chance) when the bonus is missed. In other words, when a bell or replay appears, it is difficult to expect a bonus to be won, and there is little need to diversify display results when a bell or replay is won. For this reason, in this embodiment, since the stop control by the control method is performed at the time of winning the role such as the bell or the replay, the storage capacity of the sliding frame number data can be effectively reduced. Become.

  Further, in this embodiment, when performing stop control by the table method, before the stop operation becomes effective, that is, before the stop operation is detected, the number of slip frames registered in the slip frame number data is expanded, In addition to storing in the virtual sliding piece table, when a stop operation is detected, the virtual sliding piece table is referenced, the number of sliding pieces at the corresponding stop operation position is acquired, and stop control is performed. Since it is not necessary to develop the number of sliding frames after the stop operation is detected and acquire the number of sliding frames, it is possible to quickly control the reel to stop after the stop operation is detected. After the detection, the time lag until the reel stops can be shortened as much as possible.

  Even when stop control is performed using the control method, before the stop operation becomes effective, the stop position corresponding to the winning combination is searched for each stop operation position, and the number of sliding frames based on the search result is virtually slipped. It is stored in the frame table, and when a stop operation is detected, the virtual sliding frame table is referred to obtain the number of sliding frames at the corresponding stop operation position and stop control is performed. Since it is not necessary to search for a stop position according to the winning combination after the stop is detected, it is possible to quickly perform control to stop the reel after the stop operation is detected. The time lag before stopping can be shortened as much as possible.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of sliding symbols developed from the number of sliding symbols selected according to the result of the internal lottery is stored in the virtual sliding symbol table, and further, for each stop operation position, the number of sliding symbols is classified. The stop position is searched, the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table is compared with the priority of the stopping position searched for by the number of sliding frames, and the stop acquired by the number of sliding frames. Table + control method that updates the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table to the number of sliding frames that become the stop position searched by the number of sliding frames when it is determined that the position priority is higher Therefore, even if stop control is performed using predetermined sliding piece number data, the sliding piece registered in the sliding piece number data can be controlled. It is possible to derive a stop position other than the stop position specified from. In addition, for example, an erroneous number of sliding frames in the number of sliding frame data (for example, the number of sliding frames or a prohibition that becomes a stop position where an illegal winning occurs) Even when the number of sliding frames is registered, the stop position can be corrected according to the result of the internal lottery.

  In this embodiment, when the stop control is performed by the table + control method, the number of sliding symbols developed from the sliding frame number data is stored in the virtual sliding frame table, and the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding symbols is The priority of the stop position by the number of sliding frames searched for each stop operation position is compared, and when the priority of the stop position by the number of detected sliding frames is higher, the number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table However, the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding frames developed from the number of sliding frames data is compared with the priority of the stopping position for each number of sliding frames searched for each stop operation position. If the priority of the stop position by the searched number of sliding frames is higher, the number of sliding frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. Otherwise, the number of sliding frames developed from the sliding frame number data is stored. Virtual slippery May be stored in a table, also obtained the same effect as described above in such a case.

  Further, in this embodiment, when determining the priority of the stop position, the priority is determined based on the type of the winning combination on the winning line. For example, depending on which winning line the winning winning combination is aligned with. The priority of the stop position may be determined. For example, in the sliding frame number data, the number of sliding symbols is registered so that the winning combination is aligned with the lower winning line L3, and the winning combination is aligned. If the winning position can be aligned by increasing the priority of the stop position where the winning combination is aligned with the upward winning line L5, the lower winning line L3 is also increased to the right. The winning combination can also be arranged on the winning line L5, but if it is missed (that is, if the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the number of sliding symbols is not updated by the priority determination), the winning combination is formed. Design is in Only come to stop on line L3, it is possible to limit the stopping position of the symbol constructing the winning combination. For this reason, it is possible to stop the reach that cannot appear if the winning combination is missed, by using the data of the number of sliding frames that can appear at the stop position restricted only at the time of winning the bonus.

  Also, when stop control is performed by the table + control method, before the stop operation becomes effective, the number of sliding frames registered in the sliding frame number data is expanded and stored in the virtual sliding frame table, and further the sliding frame is further recorded. The number of stop positions is searched for, and the number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table is updated based on the priority with the searched stopping position. When a stop operation is detected, the virtual sliding frame table is detected. , The stop control is performed by acquiring the number of sliding symbols at the corresponding stop operation position, and after the stop operation is detected, it is necessary to develop the number of sliding symbols and acquire the number of sliding symbols. Since there is no need to compare priorities, update the number of sliding frames, etc., it is possible to quickly control the reels to stop after a stop operation is detected. There can be as short as possible the time lag until it stops.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a bonus + small role, that is, when the bonus and the small role are won simultaneously by the internal lottery, or when the small role is won while carrying the bonus, the table + control The stop control is performed according to the method, and at this time, the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the winning bonus is selected, the stopping position where the winning small role is aligned on the winning line is searched, and the stopping specified from the sliding symbol data is performed. The position is a stop position where neither the winning bonus nor the small role stops on the winning line, and the stop position specified from the search result is the stop operation position where the selected small role stops on the winning line, the sliding position The stop position specified from the number data is the stop position where only the selected special role stops on the winning line, and the stop position specified from the search result is selected. As for the stop operation position, which is the stop position where both the different roles and small roles stop on the winning line, when all reels stop, the bonus and small roles will be duplicated, or the winning combination will be won Unless there are special circumstances such as, the number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table is updated. For this reason, the display results are derived according to the lottery results for both the case where only the bonus is won and the case where both the bonus and the small role are won without separately preparing the sliding frame number data. Therefore, the storage capacity for the sliding frame number data can be greatly reduced.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, when a bell, which is a small role that has not been missed, is won, stop control is performed by the control method, and when a bonus + bell is won, it corresponds to the winning bonus. Stop control is performed by the table + control method using the sliding frame number data. For this reason, it is not necessary to prepare any sliding frame number data corresponding to small roles that are not missed, that is, small roles for which display results need not be diversified, effectively reducing the storage capacity of sliding frame number data. It becomes possible to do.

  In this embodiment, when bonus + small combination is won, the number of sliding frames corresponding to the selected bonus is selected, the stop position where the selected small combination is aligned on the winning line is searched, and the winning combination is selected. The stop position where the selected small role is aligned on the winning line is searched, and the stop position specified from the sliding frame number data is the stop position where neither the winning bonus nor the small role stops on the winning line and is specified from the search result. The stop position is the stop operation position that is the stop position where the winning small role stops on the winning line, the stop position specified from the sliding frame number data is the stop position where only the winning special role stops on the winning line, The stop position specified from the search result is the stop position where the selected special role and small role stop at the winning line, so that the number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table is updated. However, the number of sliding pieces corresponding to the selected small role is selected, the stop position where the winning bonus is aligned on the winning line is searched, and the stop position specified from the sliding piece number data is the selected small number. Stop position where only the role stops on the winning line or stop position where neither the selected special role nor small role stops on the winning line, and the stop position specified from the search result is the stop position where the selected special role stops on the winning line The number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table may be updated for the stop operation position. That is, in the former case, when the bonus and the small role are won at the same time, the number of sliding frames when the bonus is won alone is shared, but in the latter case, the bonus and the small role are won simultaneously. In such a case, the number of sliding frames when the small role is elected alone is shared.

  For example, as an example of the latter, when the big bonus (1) + cherry is won and all reels are still rotating, as shown in FIG. 58, the area numbers 1-8, 16-17 of the left reel Is a stop position higher than the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding frames developed from the number of sliding frames, that is, the stop position where the “red 7” symbol constituting the big bonus (1) is on the winning line, Since there is no stop position specified by the number of sliding frames, the number of sliding symbols developed from the sliding frame number data and stored in the virtual sliding frame table is maintained. On the other hand, for the region numbers 9 to 15, the stop position ("red 7" symbol constituting the big bonus (1) is higher on the winning line than the stop position priority based on the number of sliding frames developed from the sliding frame number data. 12), there is a virtual sliding frame in the number of sliding frames that are determined to have the highest priority at the earliest stage and that are not stop prohibited positions in the order shown in FIG. The number of sliding frames on the table will be updated.

  In this way, when the bonus and the small role are won at the same time, if the composition is to share the sliding frame number data when the small role is won alone, the bonus and the small role are selected. It is possible to control the derivation of the display result according to the lottery results of both sides without separately preparing the sliding frame number data separately in both cases. The storage capacity can be greatly reduced, and when the bonus and small role are won at the same time, the display mode when the bonus is missed is the same as when only the small role is won, so the display result Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether or not a bonus has been won, and even when only a small role is won, a sense of expectation for winning the bonus can be given.

  In particular, an effect display device (for example, a reel that configures a winning according to a display result) is provided more easily than a variable display device that configures a winning based on a display result (reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in this embodiment). The display content of the effect display device (variable) is provided rather than the variable display device, which is provided with a large effect reel or a display device having a display area with a larger size than the display area of the reel that constitutes the winning according to the display result. A slot machine that advances a game while paying attention to the player's consciousness to a display result for presentation based on the display result of the display device, for example, a display result of a presentation reel, a display result of a virtual reel, a presentation result by an image, etc. In the so-called decorative design slot machine, when the bonus and small roles are won at the same time, the number of sliding symbols when the small role is won alone It is effective to apply a configuration that shares data, and if this is applied to this type of slot machine, whether or not a bonus is won from the display result of the variable display device that constitutes a prize according to the display result. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be more effectively focused on the display content of the effect display device than the variable display device.

  In this embodiment, stop control by the table + control method is performed when a bonus + small combination is won. However, a plurality of types of winning combinations, for example, the result of an internal lottery is a big bonus (1), a big bonus In the case of either bonus (2) or regular bonus, stop control is performed by the table + control method, and at this time, stop positions (so-called reach eyes) that are not derived from other lottery results are registered. The common sliding frame number data (see FIG. 59) is selected, and the sliding frame number in the virtual sliding frame table is updated for the stop operation position that is the stop position where the selected types of bonuses are aligned on the winning line. You may do it.

  As an example of using the common sliding piece number data for a plurality of types of winning combinations, the common sliding piece number shown in FIG. 59 is used regardless of whether the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), or regular bonus is won. When the data is stored in the virtual sliding top table and the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won, as shown in FIG. 59, the area numbers 1-8, 10-12, 16-21 of the left reel Is a stop position higher than the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding symbols developed from the number of sliding symbols, that is, the stop where the “Red 7” symbol constituting the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus is on the winning line Since the position does not exist at the stop position specified by the number of sliding frames, it is expanded from the sliding frame number data and stored in the virtual sliding frame table. The number of sliding frames being is maintained. On the other hand, for the region numbers 9 and 13 to 15, the stop position higher than the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding symbols developed from the number of sliding symbols data (“Big 7” and “Red 7” constituting the regular bonus) Since there is a stop position where the symbol is on the winning line), in the order shown in FIG. 12A, it is determined that the priority is the highest in the earliest stage and is a stop position that is not a stop prohibition position. The number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table is updated to the number. Further, when the big bonus (2) is won, as shown in FIG. 59, the area numbers 4 to 15 and 17 to 20 of the left reel depend on the number of sliding frames developed from the sliding frame number data. Since the stop position higher than the priority of the stop position, that is, the stop position where the “blue 7” symbol constituting the big bonus (2) is on the winning line does not exist at the stop position specified by the number of sliding frames, The number of sliding frames developed from the sliding frame number data and stored in the virtual sliding frame table is maintained. On the other hand, for the region numbers 1 to 3, 16, and 21, the stop position ("blue 7" symbol constituting the big bonus (2) higher than the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding frames developed from the sliding frame number data. Stop position on the winning line), the number of sliding symbols that are determined to have the highest priority at the earliest stage in the order shown in FIG. The number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table is updated.

  In addition, when the result of the internal lottery is one of (1), 1 (2), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, stop control is performed by the table + control method. At this time, select the common sliding frame number data in which stop positions (so-called chances) that are not derived in other lottery results are registered, and stop positions where each winning combination is on the winning line For the stop operation position, the number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table may be updated.

  In this way, the number of sliding symbols developed from the common number of sliding symbols data for multiple types of winning combinations is stored in the virtual sliding symbol table, and the stop operation position that becomes the stopping position where each winning combination is aligned on the winning line is as follows. By updating the number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table, even if the winning combination is different, it is possible to set different stop positions using the common sliding frame number data and depending on the result of the internal lottery Therefore, the storage capacity of the sliding frame number data can be reduced without monotonizing the display result.

  Furthermore, by using the common sliding frame number data for multiple types of bonuses with different internal lottery results, if the winning bonus is missed while reducing the storage capacity of the sliding frame number data, the common reach Can be stopped. Further, by using the common sliding frame number data for the bonus and specific small roles (for example, one (1), one (2)), the winning bonus is reduced while reducing the storage capacity of the sliding frame number data. If you miss a small role, you can stop the common chance.

  In addition, when using the common sliding frame number data for the bonus and the specific small role, the bonus and the specific small role may be won at the same time. In such a case, the small role is placed on the winning line. The number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table may be updated by giving priority to the stop position where the bonus is aligned on the winning line rather than the stop operation position that is the stop position that aligns with each other.

  In this embodiment, the stop control method, table method and table + control method, the sliding frame number data referred to when stop control is performed, the stop position search order when stop control is performed using the control method, and the table + When all reels are rotating, the control pattern for performing reel stop control, such as the priority order of stop position when performing stop control with the control method, is unique to the internal lottery result. Determined, these control patterns are uniquely selected according to the result of the internal lottery, the reel stop control is performed according to the selected control pattern, and when any of the reels is already stopped, As a result of the internal lottery, a control pattern uniquely defined for the stop position of the stopped reel is selected, and the selected control pattern is selected. The reel stop control is performed, and the result is the same when all of the reel stop status (and the stopped position of the stopped reel (display result)) are the same as a result of the internal lottery. Since the reel stop control is performed based on this control pattern, one control table is selected from a plurality of control tables for one internal lottery result as in the conventional case (for example, a lottery different from the internal lottery (for example, There is no need to make further selections such as reel control sorting lottery, etc., and the control for stopping the reels does not become complicated.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any of the reels has already stopped, according to the internal lottery result, the reel stop status and the stop position of the stopped reel, the reel Stop control is performed, but when any reel is already stopped, the internal lottery result, the reel stop status, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. The reel stop control may be performed according to the control pattern, and in this way, the internal lottery result is the same, and the stopped position (stop symbol) of the stopped reel is the same. However, if the stop operation position of the stopped reels is different, different stop control tables may be applied, so the display results of the reels are more diverse. Kill.

  Further, in this case, the stop operation position of the stopped reel is determined in an area in which the 1/2 symbol varies, that is, in a unit less than the range in which one symbol varies, and is unique to the stop operation position. The reel stop control is performed in accordance with the control pattern defined in the above, that is, it is possible to select different control patterns for different number of steps within a range in which one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps where a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if the stopped position of the stopped reel is the same and the timing at which the stop operation is performed is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, the control pattern applied to other reels Therefore, the display results of each reel can be further diversified.

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, the reel stop control is performed according to a control pattern uniquely determined with respect to the internal lottery result, the reel stop status, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. For example, in the case where no combination is won (losing), the same display result is obtained when a stop operation is performed within the range of the area number where the same stop position is determined on a specific reel. However, only when a stop operation is performed in the area of a specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, the display result that constitutes the chance pattern as the control pattern of the other reel is displayed. A stop control table that can be derived is selected, and a stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined. If, it is preferable to select a control pattern capable of deriving the display results that constitute a chance eyes as the control pattern for the other reel. As a result, even if the stop position of the reel at the time when the specific reel is stopped is the same, the stop operation position is different so that the chance is finally controlled so that it can be derived, and the control cannot be derived Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reel display result from becoming monotonous when none of the roles is won (losing).

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, the reel stop control is performed in accordance with a control pattern uniquely determined for the internal lottery result, the reel stop status, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. In each case, each time the reel stops, whether the reel to be stopped is any one of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel Are preferably transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, so that the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 can detect only the stop position of the reel when the reel is stopped. Instead, it is possible to perform different effects depending on the stop operation position.

  In particular, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the same indication is displayed when a stop operation is performed within the range of the area number where the same stop position is determined on a specific reel. The result is derived, but only when the stop operation is performed in the area of the specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is defined, the display result that configures the chance pattern as the control pattern of the other reels As a control pattern for other reels, if a control pattern that can be derived is selected and a stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, When you select a control pattern that can be used to derive the display results that make up a chance and win one of the bonuses in the normal gaming state Among the area numbers for which the same stop position is determined, display results that constitute chance chances as control patterns for other reels for more area numbers than when no combination is won in the normal gaming state When a control pattern that can be derived is selected, when the reel stop command is received, if the stop operation position satisfies the chance derivation condition, that is, the display result constituting the chance sight can be derived. If the control pattern is a stop operation position that is selected, a special role is won at a higher rate than if it is another stop operation position that does not satisfy the chance derivation condition but has the same stop position. A special effect (for example, unusual stop sound, etc.) may be given to notify the possibility of playing, and in this way, a specific reel Since the special effect is performed at the time of stopping, the possibility that the chance chance is finally derived is higher than the case where the special effect is not performed when the specific reel is stopped, and the special effect is performed. It is possible to effectively raise the player's expectation for the derivation of the chance and the winning of the special role.

  In the present embodiment, in the role-specific table, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding only to the special role, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding to both the special role and the general role, only the general role The storage address of the corresponding number of decision values is registered, and in the internal lottery, the number of decision values of each combination or combination of combinations referenced from the combination table is added to the internal random number for the internal lottery acquired. If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding only to the special role overflows, the winning of only the special role is judged, and the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the general role overflows. In such a case, the winning of both the special role and the general role is judged, and if the addition result with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the general role overflows, the winning of only the general role is judged. And Betsuyaku and the general role is adapted to be elected at the same time. In other words, by making it possible to specify the range of judgment values for each of the general roles and special roles, and the range of determination values for which the general roles and special roles are selected in duplicate, from one role-specific table. , Special role and general role can be elected at the same time. As a result, even if the general role is won as a result of the game, the winning of the special role with a higher advantage than the general role is not denied, so the player's expectation for winning the special role is maintained even in such a situation Can be made.

  In this embodiment, the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) and the cherry, one (1) or one (2) can be won simultaneously, and the big bonus (1) or big bonus Big Bonus (1) or Big Bonus (2) and Cherry are winning at the same time than the judgment value range where 1 (1) or 1 (2) is won at the same time The big bonus (1) or big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) and the probability of winning one (1) or one (2) at the same time are more than the big bonus (1) or big bonus The probability that (2) and Cherry will win at the same time is higher, so when Cherry wins than when 1 (1) or 1 (2) wins, Since the possibility of winning at the same time as the bonus (1) or big bonus (2) increases, the expectation of winning the special role will vary depending on the type of general role when the general role is won. Can increase interest.

  In this embodiment, in the role-specific table, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding only to the special role, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding to both the special role and the general role, only the general role Register the storage address of the corresponding number of judgment values, and in the internal lottery, add the number of judgment values for each combination or combination of combinations referred to from the combination table to the random number for internal lottery acquired. If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding only to the special role overflows, the winning of only the special role is judged, and the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the general role overflows. In such a case, the winning of both the special role and the general role is judged, and if the addition result with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the general role overflows, the winning of only the general role should be judged. And special And general roles can be elected at the same time, but the role table for general roles where the storage addresses for general roles are registered and the special roles for which the storage addresses for the number of judgment values for special roles are registered In the internal lottery, for the same random number for internal lottery, the lottery of the general role that refers to the role table for the general role and the special role that refers to the role-specific table for the special role In addition to performing the lottery separately, the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the general role table and the determination stored in the address area registered in the special role table By making it possible to specify from the number of values the range of judgment values in which the general role and special role are each won, and the range of judgment values in which the general role and special role are won in duplicate, General roles are elected at the same time Even if such a configuration is used, even if a winning combination for a general role occurs as a result of the game, the winning of a special role with a higher advantage than the general role is not denied. In this case, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for winning the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the storage address of the judgment value number of each combination and combination of combinations registered in the combination table may differ depending on the set value, but regardless of the set value. For the combination of combinations and combinations of combinations that have the same winning probability, the number of determination values is stored in common regardless of the set value. By storing the number of determination values in common in this way, the storage capacity required for that is reduced. However, in the role-specific table, the number of determination values stored at different addresses even if the target combination or combination of the internal lottery is the same and the addresses storing the number of determination values referenced according to the set value are different. May be the same.

  In general, in the development stage, it is assumed that the simulation is performed while adjusting the number of judgment values (that is, the winning probability) according to the setting value (that is, adjusting the winning probability of the internal lottery) for at least some of the roles. Yes. As the initial number of determination values, a different number of determination values is registered according to the set value. However, as a result of adjustment by simulation, the number of determination values when the set values are different may be the same. Although the same number of judgment values was registered as the initial number of judgment values according to the set value, the number of judgment values registered from the beginning may be used as it is depending on the result of simulation (result of simulation). The number of judgment values different from the initial value, that is, the number of judgment values may differ depending on the set value). Then, the number of determination values obtained with an appropriate result in the simulation in each case is selected as the number of determination values to be set for the mass production model.

  Here, even if the number of determination values adjusted by the simulation is the same regardless of the set value, the number of determination values is stored in the ROM 41b with the same address assignment as that in the development stage. It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values in the model for mass production from the model for development. Become.

  In addition, the internal lottery adds the number of judgment values of each combination or combination of combinations referred from the combination table to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and depending on whether the result of the addition overflows, Whether or not each winning combination or winning combination is won is determined. For this reason, an internal lottery can be performed using the number of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations as it is. It should be noted that when the winning determination table is generated before the actual winning determination is made, the loop processing is required twice, but according to this embodiment, the loop processing in the lottery processing can be performed only once. Thus, the processing efficiency of the entire lottery process is high.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the set value for determining whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is in the proper range. If the determination process 1 is executed for each game and the value read from the set value work 1 is not a value in the range of 1 to 6, it is controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In this embodiment, the value stored in the set value work 1, that is, the range of the set value that can be selected by the setting change process is a value of 1 to 6, so the value stored in the set value work 1 is 1 to 6. If the value is not in the range, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Further, a process for determining whether or not the set bet number is a bet number according to the gaming state is executed for each game, and the set bet number is not the bet number according to the game state. Control of the error state due to the RAM abnormal error disables the progress of the game. In this embodiment, the number of bets corresponding to each gaming state is determined, but if the game is played with a bet number different from the bet number, is the data stored in the RAM 41c broken? Or, since there is a possibility that an unauthorized program is operating, even if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the game state, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Then, once controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. Is not released. In other words, if the set value is not appropriate due to garbled data or illegal program operation, or if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, the set value automatically set by the slot machine The game is executed based on the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, since the setting change operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, the setting value selected by the amusement store side). Since it is ensured that the game is played, the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, whether the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 2 match, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery and the setting set when the setting is changed. When the set value determination process 2 for determining whether or not the values match is executed for each game, and the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 2 do not match However, it is controlled to an error state due to an abnormal RAM error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In the present embodiment, the setting value after the change is stored in each of the setting value work 1 and the setting value work 2 when the setting is changed. Normally, the value stored in the setting value 1 and the setting value 2 are stored. The values stored in the table should match, and if these values do not match, the setting value may have been rewritten illegally, and in this case, the progress of the game is disabled. Become.

  In addition, whether the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the internal lottery of the previous game. The set value determination process 3 for determining whether or not the set value matches is executed for each game, and the value read from the set value work 1 does not match the value read from the set value work 3 Even in this case, the game is controlled in an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In this embodiment, the set value used for the internal lottery is stored in the set value work 3, and normally the value stored in the set value 1 (the set value used in the internal lottery of the current game) and The value stored in setting value 3 (the setting value used in the previous internal lottery of the game) should match, and if these values do not match, the setting value may have been illegally rewritten. In this case, the progress of the game is disabled.

  And once it is controlled to the error state due to the RAM abnormality error by these determinations, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and the setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. The normalized state is not released. In other words, in order to restart the game when there is a possibility that the setting value has been illegally rewritten, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation that is more time-consuming than the reset operation for canceling the normal error state. Cheating can be effectively prevented.

  If there is a possibility that the setting value has been rewritten illegally, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, Since the setting change operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is performed based on the setting value selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the unused area in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is initialized for each game. Therefore, even if an illegal program is stored using the unused area of the RAM 41c, It is possible to prevent unauthorized programs from being resident.

  Further, in this embodiment, the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized for each game in addition to the unused area in the RAM 41c, so that all the unused areas in the RAM 41c at that time are stored for each game. For example, even if it is attempted to store an illegal program using an unused stack area without using an unused area of the RAM 41c, there is no room for the illegal program to reside. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the unauthorized program from being resident, and for example, to add unauthorized data (such as an address specified by the unauthorized program) to the unused stack area, causing the microcomputer to malfunction when the data is restored. By rewriting the register to an illegal one, the original program Fraud can be prevented that would carry out the operation different from the. Further, by storing illegal data in the unused stack area, an area where the saved data should be stored can be compressed, the stack area overflows, and the micro that configures the main control unit 41 is stored. Problems such as the computer running away can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized for each game. However, at least one of the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized for each game. Anything that can be initialized is acceptable.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the initialization 4 for initializing the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the end of the game, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are set for each game. If the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized at least once per game, but the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized. The timing for performing the conversion may be any timing during one game. For example, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c may be initialized at the start of the game or when a process that is always executed for each game is executed. It may be one that performs the conversion.

  Also, before the start of setting (before transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of activation, when the four initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, In addition to performing four types of initialization 1 to 4 which are initialized in different areas depending on each initialization condition, any of the four types of initialization conditions is satisfied, and an unused area in the RAM 41c is always Since the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized, it is possible to more reliably prevent the illegal program from being resident.

  In particular, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup, the unused area in the RAM 41c and the unused stack area in the stack area are always initialized. Therefore, the unused area and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are used. Even when an unauthorized program or unauthorized data is stored, it is possible to prevent the control state of the main control unit 41 from returning based on the data in the RAM 41c while the unauthorized program or the unauthorized data is stored.

  In addition, in the power interruption interrupt processing, after destructive diagnosis data with any bit set to 1 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c, the RAM parity based on all data including the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c. RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that becomes 0, and RAM parity calculated based on data stored in all areas including the unused area and unused stack area in the RAM 41c at the time of restoration Whether or not destructive diagnosis data is stored, and if the RAM parity is not 0, or even if the RAM parity is 0, the destructive diagnosis data is stored normally. If not, an error state due to a RAM error occurs, and the setting key switch 37 is ON and the power Until the initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed, the progress of the game is impossible. Therefore, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the time of startup. Even if a malicious program is stored in the computer, the malicious program can be found and initialized.

  Further, when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal and a RAM abnormal error state occurs, initialization 1 is performed to initialize all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c. Even when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, and when the setting key switch 37 is turned on after that, all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c Since the initialization 1 is performed, the malicious program that may be stored in the RAM 41c can be surely removed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the progress of the game is disabled, and the error state once caused by the RAM abnormality error. If it is controlled, the state in which the progress of the game is disabled will not be released unless the setting change mode is entered and the setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, the setting change Since the operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is performed based on the setting value selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, the data stored in the RAM 41c is abnormal in most cases when the control cannot be continued due to a malfunction such as a power failure or the CPU 41a running out of control. For this reason, in this embodiment, since it is determined whether or not the data is normal only when the CPU 41a is activated after recovering from these states, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal. The determination can be made only in a situation where there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data. That is, in a situation where there is a low possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data, it is not necessary to perform the determination, and the load on the CPU 41a can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that the result of the exclusive OR operation is 0 based on all the data in the RAM 41c in the power interruption processing, that is, Since it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal by determining whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all the areas in the RAM 41c at the time of recovery is 0, the determination is made as follows. It can be performed accurately and conveniently.

  In the present embodiment, in the interruption interrupt process, destruction diagnosis data (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1, that is, specific data other than 0 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c. After that, adjustment data for which the RAM parity is 0 based on all the data in the RAM 41c including the destructive diagnosis data is stored, and in addition to the determination of whether the RAM parity is 0 at the start-up, the destructive diagnosis data Is determined to be normal, and the RAM 41c is determined to be normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is also normally stored. The control state is restored based on the data stored in. As a result, when 00H is stored in all areas, that is, when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0 even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, it is normal by the determination of the RAM parity at startup. If the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0, the area in which the destructive diagnosis data is to be stored is also 0, and it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c has the correct contents at the time of activation.

  Further, when the CPU 41a determines that the RAM parity is 0 at startup and the data for destructive diagnosis is also normally stored, and determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the destructive diagnosis stored in the RAM 41c. Since the data for destruction diagnosis is still stored in the RAM 41c even after the activation, the data in the RAM 41c is not normal at the next activation, but the data is destroyed. Since diagnostic data is stored, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination as normal.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data in the RAM 41c and the progress of the game is disabled, a setting value changing operation as a condition for canceling the disabled state of the game is effective. As a result of the transition to the setting change mode (setting change processing), all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, so that the initial data of the RAM 41c due to the occurrence of an abnormality And initialization of data associated with selection / setting of set values can be performed at once, and unnecessary processing can be omitted. Further, when the CPU 41a is activated, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is ON before determining whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal. At that time, the setting key switch 37 is ON. If it is determined that there is, the determination as to whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal is not performed, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode, where a new setting value is selected and set. It can be omitted.

  In this embodiment, initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed before shifting to the setting change process. However, along with the shift to the setting change process. Initialization 1 may be performed, for example, after the setting change process is completed, or may be performed when the setting value is confirmed in the setting change process. In this case, since the inconvenience arises when the determined set value is changed, in initialization 1, all areas except the used stack area and the set value work of the RAM 41c are initialized. Become.

  Further, in this embodiment, once the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the game is disabled until the setting change process is performed, but the error state due to the RAM abnormality error occurs. When initialization is performed, all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, and a set value is set to an initial value (for example, set value 1), and a reset operation is performed in this state. Thus, the game may be restarted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the voltage drop signal is input to the trigger terminal CLK / TRG, the CPU 41a interrupts the process being executed and executes the power interruption process. In the process including the process for setting the data for destructive diagnosis and the process for calculating and setting the data for adjusting the RAM parity, the process for making it possible to determine whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery or the initial setting of the output port It is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input to the signal input terminal DATA before performing the conversion or the like. If the voltage drop signal is also input to the signal input terminal DATA, the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery. If the voltage drop signal is not input to the signal input terminal DATA, the original processing is performed. It is adapted to return.

  That is, the voltage drop signal is input to the two systems of the input unit to the main control unit 41, and the CPU 41a does not perform the power interruption interrupt process when the voltage drop signal is input to one of the input units. Before the process for enabling determination of whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the initialization of the output port, or the like is performed, it is determined again whether or not the voltage drop signal is input to the other input unit. These processes are executed only when a voltage drop signal is also input to the input section of this, and when power failure is detected by mistake, whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery is detected. Since it is possible to prevent the process for enabling the determination and the process such as the initialization of the output port from being performed, the control of the CPU 41a may be interrupted for an unnecessarily long time due to erroneous detection of power interruption. More than necessary Possible to prevent the load is applied to.

  In addition, other interrupts are prohibited during the execution of the power interruption interrupt process and the timer interrupt process (main). For example, the voltage drops during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main). Even when a signal is input, double interruptions do not occur, and it is possible to prevent the processing load on the CPU 41a from increasing and data consistency from being lost. In particular, even if a voltage drop signal is input during the transmission of a command, no interruption occurs and the transmission of the command is not hindered, and the transmission can be completed normally before the CPU 41a stops driving. .

  If the interrupt timing of the power interruption interrupt processing and the interrupt timing of the timer interrupt processing (main) are simultaneous, that is, if interrupt 2 and interrupt 3 occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 Priority is given to the power interruption interrupt process, and if interrupt 2 occurs during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main), the power interruption occurs after the timer interrupt process (main) ends. Since interrupt processing is performed and power interruption interrupt processing is performed at the earliest possible stage while preventing multiple interrupts, it is ensured that power interruption interrupt processing is performed before the CPU 41a stops driving. It can be carried out.

  Further, the CPU 41a can execute four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4, and when interrupts 1 and 4 that are set to unused are generated, the CPU 41a immediately returns to the original process. The unused interrupt processing to be executed is executed. For this reason, even if unused interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the process immediately returns to the process before the interrupt. Therefore, even if an unused interrupt occurs due to noise or the like, the CPU 41a runs out of control. It is possible to prevent such troubles.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and the BB winning effect waiting time elapses after the game ends. As long as possible, medals stored as credits (including medals used to set bets) can be returned even during periods when setting bets is prohibited. Reflecting the will of the player, the medal for the credit stored as owned by the player can be received. Thus, for example, in a game in which a big bonus prize has occurred, before starting the big bonus game accompanying the occurrence of the big bonus prize, a part of the medal memorized as the credit is given as a prize (for example, a soft drink or a cigarette). Etc.), but it is possible to receive a medal return reflecting such a player's will.

  In addition, when a big bonus prize is generated, an effect at the time of BB winning indicating that the big bonus prize has occurred is executed, so that the player's interest in shifting to the big bonus accompanying the occurrence of the big bonus prize is effective. Can be enhanced.

  Also, in the game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and setting of the bet number is prohibited until the ending effect waiting time elapses after the game ends. even in that period, it becomes possible to return the medals stored as credits (including medals used for betting amount setting), unless to reflect the will of the player's possible, It is possible to receive a medal for the credit stored as owned by the player. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the big bonus.

  Further, since the ending effect indicating that the big bonus has ended is executed at the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the end of the big bonus can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, even in a game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, even when the game is controlled to be stopped, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, the game ends, and the store clerk performs a reset operation. Medals stored as credits (including medals used to set bets) are to be returned even during the period when setting of bets is prohibited until the stoppage is released Therefore, it is possible to receive medals for credits stored as belonging to the player, reflecting the player's will as much as possible. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the big bonus.

  In addition, after a determination is made that the game in which the big bonus prize has occurred is terminated, a power interruption occurs in the period until the BB prize presentation effect waiting time elapses. When the time excluding the time already passed before the power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time, the prohibition on the setting of the bet number is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted, whereas the BB prize is won. When power interruption occurs in the stage before the time effect reaches the final stage, and then returns, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the bet amount is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the start of the BB winning effect, the power is cut off before the end of the BB winning effect, and after that, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning. When a new command is received during execution of the time effect, the current BB winning effect is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so the BB winning effect is troublesome for the player. The control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant in spite of the fact that the control state on the main control unit 41 side is progressing, and there is a discrepancy between both control states. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 backs up whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and backs up that the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage at the next activation. If so, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the fact that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is backed up, the BB winning effect is returned to the final stage state. Yes. For this reason, when power interruption occurs in a state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed is not executed from the beginning after the return, so the BB winning effect is performed. Can be more effectively prevented from becoming annoying for the player.

  Also, for example, during the period from the determination of the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred until the BB winning stage production waiting time elapses, credit settlement is executed, and medals are being paid out along with this settlement. When a payout error occurs and the payout error is canceled, the bet amount is set when the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error has elapsed from the production waiting time of the BB winning effect. When the prohibition is canceled and the setting of the number of bets is permitted, a payout error occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled. The BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the bet amount is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the BB winning effect is started, the error state is controlled before the BB winning effect is finished, and when the error state is canceled after that, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning. If a new command is received during the execution of the BB winning effect, the effect based on the newly received command is executed after the BB winning effect being executed is cancelled, and the BB winning effect is displayed by the player. Can be prevented, and the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant despite the progress of the control state on the main control unit 41 side, and there is a discrepancy between the two control states. It can be prevented from occurring.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data indicating whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of the error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It comes to return in the state of. For this reason, if an error occurs in the state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed will not be executed from the beginning after the error is canceled. It is possible to more effectively prevent the BB winning effect from becoming troublesome for the player.

  In addition, when the stop function is not set, a power interruption occurs after the end of the game for which the end condition of the big bonus has been established, and until the ending effect production waiting time elapses. In the case of returning, when the time excluding the time already passed before power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time of the ending effect, the prohibition on setting of the bet amount is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted On the other hand, if a power interruption occurs at a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the number of bets is set and a BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, when the ending effect is started and then interrupted before the end of the ending effect, and then returned from the power interruption, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When the command is received, the ending effect being executed is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming annoying for the player, and the main Although the control state on the control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 backs up whether the ending effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and if the fact that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage at the next start-up is backed up, If the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage and the fact that the ending effect is in the final stage is backed up, the ending effect is returned to the final stage. For this reason, if a power interruption occurs when the ending effect has reached the final stage, the ending effect that was being executed will not be executed from the beginning after the return, so the ending effect is troublesome for the player. Can be effectively prevented.

  In addition, when the stop function is not set, after the end of the game for which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined and the waiting time for the ending effect is over, for example, credit settlement is performed. If a payout error occurs during the payout of medals associated with this settlement, and the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error occurs from the waiting time of the ending production At that point, the prohibition on setting of the number of bets is lifted and the setting of the number of bets is permitted, whereas a payout error occurs at the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage. When the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the number of bets is set and a BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the ending effect is started, it is controlled to an error state before the ending effect ends, and when the error state is canceled after that, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When a new command is received, the ending effect being executed is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming annoying for the player. Even though the control state on the main control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data indicating whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of the error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It comes to return in the state of. For this reason, if an error occurs in the state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed will not be executed from the beginning after the error is canceled. It is possible to more effectively prevent the BB winning effect from becoming troublesome for the player.

  In addition, when the stop function is set, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, it is determined that the power interruption occurs in the period until the waiting time for the ending effect is over. When returning, after the time excluding the time already passed before the power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and the stop state is released. The prohibition on the setting of the bet number is also released at that time, and the setting of the bet number is permitted, whereas a power outage occurs before the ending effect reaches the final stage, and then returns The ending effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage. For this reason, after the ending effect is started, the power is interrupted before the end of the ending effect, and then the ending effect is executed from the beginning when the power is restored from the power interruption. When the command indicating the start of the state is received, the running ending effect is canceled and the in-stop notification is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming troublesome for the player, Although the control state on the main control unit 41 side is progressing, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In addition, when the stop function is set, after the end of the game in which the big bonus ending condition is satisfied is determined and until the ending effect production waiting time elapses, for example, credit settlement is performed. If a payout error occurs during the payout of medals associated with this settlement, and the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error occurs from the waiting time of the ending production After the elapse of time, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and when the batting state is released, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is also released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted. If a payout error occurs before the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect It is performed from the initial course stages. For this reason, after an ending effect is started, if an error occurs before the ending effect ends, and then the error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When a command indicating the start of the stop state is received, the running ending effect is canceled and the stop notification is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the ending effect from becoming annoying for the player. Even though the control state on the main control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In addition, the time required to execute the progress stage of the BB winning effect and the ending effect, that is, the time until the transition to the final stage is determined as the waiting time for the BB winning effect and the ending effect, that is, the end of the game. Since the set time is shorter than the time when the setting of the bet number is prohibited, the BB winning that was executed after returning to the final stage of the BB winning effect and the ending effect was cut off. Even when the time effect and the ending effect are executed from the beginning, the overlapping period between the period when the BB winning effect and the ending effect are executed and the period until the prohibition of the setting of the bet number is canceled, It is possible to prevent the discrepancy between the control states of both the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 as much as possible.

  In this embodiment, before the BB winning effect and the ending effect waiting time elapses, an error occurs and the BB winning effect and the ending effect are awaited while the error is being controlled. The timing of the waiting time for the BB winning effect and the ending effect is resumed from the time when the timing of the time is interrupted and the error state is canceled. The time measurement may be performed without interruption even while it is controlled to the error state, and in this way, when the error state is canceled, the prohibition of the setting of the bet amount is canceled, The bet number can be set as early as possible and the bet number set in this state cancels the resumed BB winning effect and ending effect. Therefore, these effects are not bothersome for the player, but the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant despite the progress of the control state on the main control unit 41 side, It is possible to prevent a difference in state from occurring.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the regular bonus is activated at the same time as the transition to the big bonus. During the big bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is activated for each game. When it is determined that it is not activated, the regular bonus is activated again, so that the regular bonus is always controlled while the big bonus is activated. For this reason, it is only necessary to control the regular bonus while the big bonus is in operation, so the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified, and whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. Since the determination as to whether or not is made, the control program of each game in the big bonus can be made common regardless of whether or not the regular bonus is in operation, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Further, while the big bonus is in operation, the regular bonus is always controlled so that the medals can be increased fastest during the big bonus. Therefore, the regular bonus is activated in accordance with the JACIN winning as in the conventional case. It is possible to enhance the interest of the player with the shift to the big bonus. In particular, the end condition is satisfied when the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds a specified value (465 in this embodiment) without ending the big bonus at the number of transitions to the regular bonus as in this embodiment. If it is established, the number of net increase in the big bonus can be increased, so that the interest of the player accompanying the shift to the big bonus can be further increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, before determining whether or not the regular bonus is inactive, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus is activated. If the regular bonus is not activated, the regular bonus is activated. There is no determination for reactivating the device, that is, no unnecessary determination is made.

  In this embodiment, after the regular bonus operation starts, the number of games controlled by the regular bonus reaches the specified number of games (12 games in this embodiment) or the specified number of games (8 in this embodiment). ) The game ends when a winning occurs. However, the regular bonus may be ended under only one of the conditions. It may be completed only when it occurs. Also, it may end when the total number of medals paid out and the net increase in the regular bonus (the total number of medals paid out minus the total number of medals consumed in setting the number of bets) exceeds a prescribed number. The process may be terminated when any one of these conditions is satisfied.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the operation of the big bonus is started, the big bonus is ended when the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds a predetermined value (465 in this embodiment). However, the big bonus may be terminated under other conditions. For example, the net increase in the number of medals in the big bonus (the number obtained by subtracting the total number of medals consumed in setting the number of bets from the total number of medals paid out) Ends when the number exceeds the specified value, the number of games controlled by the big bonus reaches the specified number of games, the number of transitions to the regular bonus reaches the specified number, and the regular bonus ends To complete the Big Bonus end condition, or if any of these conditions is satisfied, the Big Bonus end condition It may be established.

  Also, in this embodiment, during the big bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game, but at the same time as the transition to the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated, By activating the regular bonus again at the end of the regular bonus, the regular bonus may always be controlled while the big bonus is active. While it is necessary to control only the regular bonus while the game is in progress, it is possible to simplify the control associated with the transition to the big bonus, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not the regular bonus is in operation for each game. If the process to reactivate the regular bonus is performed only when the regular bonus ends In prayer, unnecessary processing will not be performed in a state where the control of the regular bonus has not been completed.

  Also, in this case, at the end of the regular bonus, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied before the regular bonus is activated again, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If not, it is preferable to activate the regular bonus again. By doing so, the regular bonus is not reactivated even though the big bonus ends immediately.

  In addition, after the transition to the big bonus, the first regular bonus may be triggered by the occurrence of a specific winning or the like, and the subsequent regular bonus may be reactivated at the end of the regular bonus.

  In the present embodiment, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus has elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed. When the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops and the output waiting time elapses in this state. The output of the RB signal is restarted again. For this reason, it is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by an external device that has received an RB signal, for example, whether or not the slot machine is operating normally from the externally output signal. Can be properly implemented with an external device.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the CPU 41a determines whether or not the prize is abnormal, if the value of the bit assigned to each kind of the combination is 0, it indicates that the winning of the combination is permitted. If the value is 1, the abnormal winning determination flag indicating that the winning of the winning combination is not permitted, and the value of the bit assigned to each winning type is 1, the fact that the winning combination has been won And a winning symbol flag indicating that the winning combination has not been won when it is 1, and F indicates whether the calculation result is 0, that is, whether the calculation result is 0 or not. It is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormal winning only by referring to the value of the zero flag of the register. Since it is not necessary to confirm, it is judged whether it is an abnormal prize. It can be processed simplified when performing.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the value of the bit assigned to each type of the combination is 1, it indicates that the winning of the corresponding combination is permitted, and when it is 0, the winning of the corresponding combination is permitted. An internal winning flag indicating that there is not present is set in the internal winning flag storing work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c, and an operation for reversing 1 and 0 of each bit of the winning flag is performed, whereby an abnormal winning determination flag is set. It is designed to create. That is, the abnormal winning determination flag can be easily created using the winning flag.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when an abnormal winning occurs, that is, when a combination that is not permitted in the game is won, the game is controlled to an error state due to an abnormal winning error and the progress of the game is disabled. Is done. That is, when an unacceptable winning combination wins, the data may be destroyed or an abnormal program may be operating, so that the progress of the game is disabled.

  Once an error state due to a RAM error or an abnormal winning error is controlled, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting change operation. The normalized state is not released. In other words, if the set value is not appropriate due to garbled data or abnormal program operation, or if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the game state, or if an unacceptable hand wins, the slot machine The setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation instead of the setting value automatically set by (the setting change operation is generally performed by an employee of the amusement store. Since it is ensured that the game is played based on the value), the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a transmits a command corresponding to the progress of the game to the effect control board 90, and the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 receives the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Since the CPU 41a does not need to control the presentation only by sending a command, the processing load on the CPU 41a can be reduced and the presentation can be made various. .

  Further, a command transmission line for transmitting a command from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is connected between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 via the effect relay board 80, and the game control board Since the production control board 90 is not directly connected to 40, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the command transmission line to the CPU 41a from the outside and affecting the control of the game.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  For example, stop operation is effective for processing to expand the number of sliding frames registered in the number of sliding frame data, processing to search for stop positions by number of sliding frames, and processing to compare priorities with searched stop positions, etc. The number of sliding frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table in advance, and when a stop operation is detected, the virtual sliding frame table is referred to and the number of sliding frames at the corresponding stop operation position is determined. Acquires and performs stop control, but does not provide a virtual sliding piece table, and when the stopping operation is performed, the above processing is performed to acquire the number of sliding pieces corresponding to the timing of the stopping operation. You may do it.

  In the above embodiment, the number of sliding frames is applied as the derivation information. However, any number may be used as long as the stop position can be specified. It may be applied.

  In the embodiment, stop control by the table method, the control method, and the table + control method is selected according to the result of the internal lottery. For example, the stop timing (reel that stops first (first stop)) Or the second reel to stop (second stop) or the third reel to stop (second stop). For example, regardless of the result of the internal lottery, For the first stop, stop control is performed by the table method, and for the second and subsequent stops, the stop control by the table method, the control method, the table + control method is selected according to the result of the internal lottery and the stop position of the stopped reel. You may do it.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the value of 6 steps of the range of 1-6 is applied as a setting value used for internal lottery, ie, the setting value which determined the winning probability of internal lottery, a setting value is restricted to this. Any setting value can be used as long as it can select and set at least a plurality of setting values. For example, a setting value that can select two levels of high / low and a setting value of three levels in the range of 1 to 3 can be selected. Selectable setting values may be applied. Furthermore, the set values work 1 to 3 in the RAM 41c store the values 1 to 6 themselves as values indicating these set values, but any value that can specify the set value may be stored. For example, 0 to 5 (a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the actual setting value) corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6 may be stored in the setting value works 1 to 3.

  Moreover, in the said Example, the setting value determination process 1 which determines whether the value read from the setting value work 1 is the range of 1-6, the value read from the setting value work 1, and the reading from the setting value work 2 Set value determination processing 2 for determining whether or not the values match, set value determination for determining whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match All of the processing 3 is executed to determine whether or not the setting value used for the internal lottery is appropriate. However, by performing any one of these setting value determination processing 1 to 3, the internal lottery For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the set value to be used is appropriate. For example, only the set value determination process 1, only the set value determination process 2, or only the set value determination process 3 is performed. What to do, one of the set value determination processes 1 to 3 One of the processing to perform, or the like may be used.

  Further, any one of the set value determination processes 1 to 3 is performed for each game, and the remaining one process or all of the remaining processes are performed at a predetermined opportunity (for example, every predetermined number of games, at the end of the bonus, Or two of the set value determination processes may be performed for each game, and the remaining one process may be performed with a predetermined opportunity.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the setting value determination processes 1-3 are performed for every game, it does not perform a setting value determination process for every game, but sets the setting value determination processes 1-3 for the predetermined number of games. It may be performed every time or in a game of a specific period (such as a period excluding bonus).

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the setting value determination process 1-3 which determines whether the setting value used for an internal lottery is appropriate in the internal lottery process, the timing is in 1 game Any timing may be used, for example, at the start of the game or at the end of the game.

  In the embodiment, in the internal lottery process, the value of the set value work 3 is updated to the value read from the set value work 1 (the set value read for use in the internal lottery of the current game). The timing at which the value of the set value work 3 is updated to the value read from the set value work 1 is any timing until the game ends (for example, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, Etc.) at the end of the withdrawal.

  In the embodiment, when the setting is changed, the set value is stored in the two areas of the set value work 1 and the set value work 2. In the set value determination process 2, the value stored in the set value work 1 and the setting are stored. It is determined whether or not the value stored in the value work 2 matches, and if it does not match, it is determined that it is not an appropriate setting value, but the setting value is stored in three or more storage areas when the setting is changed. In the set value determination process 2, it is determined whether or not all the values stored in these three or more storage areas match, and if they do not match, it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate setting value. Also good.

  Furthermore, when the setting is changed, the set value is stored in three or more storage areas. In the set value determination process 2, whether or not the values stored in these three or more areas match a predetermined number or more (for example, 5 Setting values are stored in one storage area, and it is determined whether or not three or more of the values match, and if a predetermined number or more does not match, it may be determined that the setting values are not appropriate. In this way, even if a part of the data indicating the setting value stored at the time of changing the setting is lost due to noise or the like, it is erroneously determined that the setting value is not appropriate and the progress of the game is disabled. Can be prevented.

  In the above embodiment, only the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game is stored in the set value work 3. In the set value determination process 3, the value stored in the set value work 1 and the set value work 3 are stored. Whether the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game match and match. If not, it is determined that the setting value is not appropriate, but the setting value used for the internal lottery of each game is stored for a predetermined number of games before the previous game, and the setting value determination processing 3 It is determined whether or not the set value used for the lottery matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the game before the previous game (for example, a game before a predetermined number of games). Appropriate setting In it it may be determined that there is no.

  In addition, the setting values used for the internal lottery of each game are stored for a predetermined number of games before the previous game, and the setting values used for the internal lottery of the current game in the setting value determination process 3 and a plurality of values before the previous game It may be determined whether or not all the set values used in the internal lottery of the game match, and if they do not match, it is determined that the set values are not appropriate.

  Furthermore, the set values used for the internal lottery of each game are stored for a predetermined number of games before the previous game, and the set values used for the internal lottery of the current game in the set value determination process 3 and a plurality of values before the previous game are stored. Whether or not each set value used for the internal lottery of the game matches a predetermined number or more (for example, each set value used for the internal lottery of the past five games is stored in five storage areas, of which 3 It is also possible to determine whether or not two or more values match, and if it does not match a predetermined number or more, it may be determined that the setting value is not an appropriate setting value. Even when a part of the data indicating the set value stored at the time is lost, it is possible to prevent the game from being disabled due to an erroneous determination that the set value is not appropriate.

  Further, in the embodiment, when determining the winning of the winning in the internal lottery process, if it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate set value in the set value determining process, the RAM is controlled to be in an abnormal error state. However, when the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is not an appropriate value (a value in the range of 1 to 6), a prize is won with a probability based on the initial value of the set value (for example, the set value 1). You may make it determine the winning of.

  In the embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 0 in the power interruption processing, and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is 0 at the time of restoration. Although it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal, of course, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 in the power interruption processing, and the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 at the time of restoration. By determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal, it may be determined. Further, the checksum (exclusive OR of the data stored in the corresponding area) of all areas of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing, and is stored in a specific area, and at the time of recovery, the RAM 41c is restored. If the result is 00H, it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, and if it is not 00H, the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal. You may make it determine with it.

  If the checksum is stored normally in the power interruption processing, the checksum of the area excluding the specific area and the data stored in the specific area (the checksum calculated at the time of power interruption) ) Should take the same value, and if the checksum of the area excluding the specific area matches the data stored in the specific area, the result of calculating the exclusive OR of both data is This is because the result of calculating the checksum of all the areas including the specific area where the checksum of the RAM 41c is stored is 00H, so that the data of the RAM 41c can be determined to be normal.

  Even in this case, in the power interruption interrupt processing, before the checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data (for example, 5AH) in which any bit is 1 is stored in a predetermined address, and at the time of recovery, In addition to determining whether or not the checksum is 00H, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally. The condition is that the checksum is 00H and the data for destructive diagnosis is also normal. In addition, it is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal. Even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, if 00H is stored in all areas, it is determined to be normal by the checksum determination at the time of startup, but any bit is set to 1 at the time of power failure. After destructive diagnostic data is stored, the checksum is calculated and stored in a specific area. In addition to checking the checksum at startup, the destructive diagnostic data is also checked. Even when all the areas are cleared to 0 and the checksum is 00H and is determined to be normal, the destruction diagnosis data does not match the value stored at the time of the power failure and is determined to be abnormal. It is possible to improve the accuracy of determining the abnormality of the data stored in.

  In the above, the RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing and stored in the RAM 41c, and whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of restoration is 0. Or whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal based on whether or not the checksum calculated based on all the areas of the RAM 41c is 00H. In the interruption interrupt processing, the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is determined. Alternatively, a checksum is calculated and stored in a specific area, and at the time of recovery, a RAM parity or checksum excluding the specific area of the RAM 41c is calculated and compared with the RAM parity or checksum stored in the specific area. Data in RAM 41c is normal depending on whether the results match Whether may be determined. In this case as well, as described above, before the RAM parity or checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored at a predetermined address. In addition to determining whether or not the sums match, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, the RAM parity and checksum match, and the destructive diagnostic data is also normal. It is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal under the above conditions.

  In the above embodiment, 5AH is stored in the RAM 41c as the failure diagnosis data in the power interruption processing. However, any data other than 0 can be stored and confirmed at the start-up. Even in the configuration, when all areas are cleared to 0 at the time of startup, the data for destruction diagnosis does not match the value stored at the time of a power failure and is determined to be abnormal, so it is stored in the RAM 41c. The accuracy of data abnormality determination can be increased.

  In the above embodiment, when the CPU 41a is started, the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is calculated, it is determined whether or not the result is 0, and the destructive diagnosis data is normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. However, first, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, and on condition that the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally. The RAM parity of the RAM 41c may be calculated and it may be determined whether or not the result is 0. In this way, if the destructive diagnosis data is not normally stored, the RAM parity is calculated. Without calculation, it can be determined that the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal.

  In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal only when the main control unit 41 is activated. However, other triggers, for example, each game may be determined.

  In the embodiment, the main control unit 41 is activated based on a reset signal from a reset circuit 49 provided separately from the main control unit 41. However, the reset circuit is connected to the main control unit 41. The microcomputer which comprises may be mounted.

  In the above-described embodiment, the RAM 41c is mounted on the microcomputer constituting the main control unit 41. However, a RAM used as a work of the microcomputer may be mounted outside the microcomputer.

  In the embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the DC voltage used in the slot machine 1 and detects the power interruption when the DC voltage becomes a certain voltage or lower. You may make it detect a power interruption, when the period when the said DC voltage became below a fixed voltage continued for a fixed period. Alternatively, the AC voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 may be monitored to detect a power interruption when a disturbance in the waveform of the AC voltage is detected or when the period continues for a certain period.

  In the above embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 is mounted on the game control board 40. However, the power interruption detection circuit 48 may be mounted in other places. For example, the game control board 40 may be connected to the power supply board 100 or the power supply board 100. It may be mounted on a relay board or the like through which a power supply line is connected.

  Moreover, in the said Example, the error is alert | reported by displaying on the game auxiliary | assistance display 12 the error code according to the error state on the content of various error states. In other words, the notification means controlled by the game control unit 41 notifies the sub-control unit 91 of a command indicating an error state in addition to the notification means controlled by the game control unit 41. The notification unit controlled by the control unit 91 may notify the error, or the notification unit controlled by the game control unit 41 does not perform the notification, but the notification unit controlled by the sub-control unit 91 An error notification may be performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, after the game ends at the time of the big bonus winning, after the game ends at the end of the big bonus when the stop function is set to be invalid, after the game ends at the time of the big bonus winning, Until the ending waiting time elapses, after the ending waiting time elapses at the end of the big bonus when the stop function is enabled, the clerk performs a reset operation until the stop state is released The setting of the number of bets is prohibited in any of the periods, but any setting is possible as long as the setting of the number of bets is prohibited in at least one of these periods.

  Further, although the slot machine 1 of the above embodiment is equipped with a stop function, it may be applied to a slot machine not equipped with a stop function.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the waiting time for producing the BB winning effect and the waiting time for producing the BB end effect may be the same time or different times.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus winning is applied as the transition winning in which the setting of the number of bets is prohibited for a certain period of time (the waiting time for production of the BB winning effect) at the time of winning. Regular bonus winning etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to multiple types of special roles. Furthermore, even for special roles of the same type, one of a plurality of types of bonus bonuses and regular bonus winnings (for example, a combination of symbols constituting the bonus winning, a color of symbols constituting the bonus winning) Or if the two are different, or if the bonus consists of different bonus controls, such as the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Sometimes the setting of the number of bets may be prohibited for a certain period. In addition, the period during which the setting of the bet amount is prohibited at the time of winning may differ depending on the type of special combination (big bonus winning and regular bonus winning), and the type of big bonus winning or regular bonus winning. Then, an effect at the time of bonus winning having a different execution time may be executed according to a period during which setting of the bet number is prohibited.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus is applied as the special gaming state in which the setting of the number of bets is prohibited for a certain period of time (ending waiting time for producing the ending effect) at the end, but other special gaming states (regular) Bonus etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of special game states. In addition, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are multiple types of big bonuses and regular bonuses (for example, combinations of symbols constituting a bonus prize that triggers the transition to the bonus, timing for transitioning to the bonus If one or both of the colors of the symbols constituting the bonus prize are different, or the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Only a specific bonus may be set to be prohibited for a certain period at the end. Further, the period during which the setting of the number of bets is prohibited at the end may differ depending on the type of special gaming state (big bonus and regular bonus) and the type of big bonus or regular bonus. And you may make it perform the ending effect from which execution time differs according to the period when the setting of the number of bets is prohibited.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus is applied as the special game state controlled to the stop state in which the setting of the bet number is prohibited until the reset operation is performed after the end, but other special game states (Regular Bonus etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of special game states. In addition, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are multiple types of big bonuses and regular bonuses (for example, combinations of symbols constituting a bonus prize that triggers the transition to the bonus, timing for transitioning to the bonus If one or both of the colors of the symbols constituting the bonus prize are different, or the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Only a specific bonus may be controlled to be stopped after completion.

  Further, in the above embodiment, even in a game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, at the time when the end of the game is determined, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled and the setting of the bet amount is prohibited ( In the ending effect stage waiting time, the credit can be settled. For example, in a game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined is the ending effect stage waiting time. Control to the stop state when reaching the, and prohibit both setting of the number of bets and the settlement of the credit until the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined reaches the production waiting time of the ending effect, When the elapsed time reaches the production waiting time for the ending production, only the prohibition of credit settlement may be canceled. As a result, in the game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the credit cannot be settled until the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined reaches the ending effect production waiting time. Since it is possible to settle credits without waiting for the release of the stop state, the medal for the credits stored as owned by the player should be returned, reflecting the player's will as much as possible. Can receive. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end waiting time for the ending effect has elapsed, particularly when the big bonus ends.

  In the above embodiment, the end of the game is determined by the end of the game end processing. However, the game is substantially ended by the end of the medal payout. The end may be determined. In other words, the credit can be settled from the end of the payout process.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the timer counter common to the production wait time timer count for timing the production waiting time for the BB winning production and the production wait time timer count for measuring the production waiting time for the ending production is provided. However, these timer counters may be provided separately.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is 1 and the values of the other bits are 0 in the winning flag. In the winning symbol flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is 1 and the values of the other bits are 0. Then, all the bits of the internal winning flag are inverted, and a logical product (AND) with the winning symbol flag is calculated, and when the result becomes 00H (all bits are 0), other than the regular winning, other than 00H (any one) When the bit becomes 1), it is determined that the prize is abnormal.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 60, after calculating the logical product (AND) of the value obtained by inverting all the bits of the winning flag and the winning symbol flag, as in the above embodiment, all of the values thus calculated are calculated. The bits may be further inverted, and it may be determined that the regular winning is achieved when the result is FFH (all bits are 1), and the abnormal winning is determined when the result is other than FFH (any bit is 0).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 61, after calculating the logical sum (OR) of the winning flag and the value obtained by inverting all the winning symbol flags, all the bits of the calculated value are further inverted, and the result is The regular winning may be determined when 00H (all bits are 0), and the abnormal winning may be determined when other than 00H (any bit is 1). In this case, as in the above-described embodiment, it is determined whether or not the prize is abnormal by simply checking the value of the zero flag of the F register (flag register) indicating whether the calculation result is 00H, that is, whether the calculation result is zero. Can be determined.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 62, a logical sum (OR) of the winning flag and the value obtained by inverting all the bits of the winning symbol is calculated, and when the result becomes FFH (all bits are 1), the regular winning is obtained. , FFH other than (any bit is 0), it may be determined as an abnormal winning.

  As described above, also in the modified examples of the abnormal winning determination shown in FIGS. 60 to 61, the logical sum operation or the logical product operation is performed on the winning flag or the value obtained by inverting the winning flag and the winning symbol flag or the value obtained by inverting the winning symbol flag. It is possible to determine whether the result is an abnormal prize or not only by determining whether the result is a value other than 0 or a value other than 1.

  In the case of FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, if the winning symbol flag set in accordance with winning is reversed in advance for all bits, that is, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is 0, the other bits If the winning symbol flag is set so that the value of 1 becomes 1, the step of inverting all the bits of the winning symbol flag in the abnormal winning determination process becomes unnecessary.

  In the case of FIGS. 60 and 61, when determining whether or not the calculation result is FFH, 1 is added to the calculation result, and when the value after the addition overflows, it is determined that the calculation result is FFH. When the overflow does not occur, it is preferable to determine that the operation result is other than FFH. In such a case, it is only necessary to check the value of the carry flag of the F register indicating whether the operation result has overflowed. It is possible to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred.

  Next, as in the above embodiment, the winning flag has a value of 1 corresponding to the winning combination, and the other bits have a value of 0, and the winning symbol flag corresponds to the winning combination. A description will be given of a modified example in which an abnormal winning is determined without inverting all the bits of any flag when the bit value is 1 and the other bit values are 0.

  In this modification, the winning flag is applied as an abnormal winning determination flag. Then, from the value of each bit of the internal winning flag, the value of the bit at the same position in the winning symbol flag is subtracted, and on the condition that the subtraction result does not become a negative number in all the bits, whether or not it is an abnormal winning Determine whether. For example, the value of the 0th bit of the winning symbol flag is subtracted from the value of the 0th bit of the winning flag to determine whether or not the subtraction result is a negative number. Subtract the first bit value of the winning symbol flag from the value of the next bit, that is, the first bit of the internal winning flag, and determine the result. Finally, all the bits from the 0th bit to the 15th bit In step (1), it is determined that the winning is not abnormal, on the condition that the subtraction result does not become a negative number.

  In such a case, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormal winning only by confirming the value of the sign flag of the F register indicating whether or not the calculation result has become a negative number. Furthermore, as in the above-described embodiments and modifications, it is possible to determine whether the winning flag or the winning symbol flag is an abnormal winning without inverting the bit.

  Moreover, in the said Example, the determination value number storage area | region of RAM41c in which the determination value number used for an internal lottery is memorize | stored shall memorize | store the determination value number in each case using a 2 byte area | region. Of course, in a general slot machine, the number of judgment values for special roles is not often set to exceed 255 in any gaming situation. As described above, for those that do not need to set the number of determination values exceeding 255, the number of determination values may be stored using only a 1-byte area.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, some of the determination values that are common regardless of the set value are stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6, but the number of determination values is related to the set value. Even common items can be individually stored for each of the setting values 1 to 6. Further, if the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, all of them can be stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6.

  Moreover, in the said Example, it was whether it memorize | stored in common with the whole setting value 1-6, or it memorize | stored separately with respect to each of the setting values 1-6 in the said Example. However, it is assumed that the number of determination values is not stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 6 (the common flag for the setting value is not set). About 4-6, the number of judgment values can also be made common.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of determination values referred to according to the gaming state (state number) for the same combination or combination of combinations at the same set value is different for each gaming state (state number) Was stored. That is, the same combination or combination of combinations with the same set value is stored separately even if the number of determination values referred to according to the gaming state (state number) is the same, but the gaming state (state number) Regardless of the combination of combinations or combinations of combinations that have the same winning probability regardless, the storage address of the judgment value number is shared, or the winning probability is the same regardless of the setting value and gaming state (state number) For the combination or combination of combinations, the storage address of the determination value number may be made common, and by storing the determination value number in common in this way, the storage capacity required for this is reduced. It will be enough.

  In the embodiment, the number of determination values acquired according to the set value or the like is sequentially added to the random number value for internal lottery, but from the value of random number for internal lottery that acquired the acquired determination value number, Subtraction may be performed sequentially, and the result of the subtraction may be used as a new random value for internal lottery. When the number of determination values is subtracted from the random number value for internal lottery, it can be determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the subtraction result (here, the subtraction result becomes negative).

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations corresponding to the gaming state is sequentially added to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and the addition result overflows The combination or combination of combinations was determined to be winning. On the other hand, a winning determination table that defines a range of determination values for determining each combination or combination as winning according to the number of determination values for each combination or combination according to the gaming state is determined for each game. The internal lottery may be performed by comparing the created and acquired random number value for internal lottery with the range of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations. In addition, a winning determination table in which a range of determination values for determining each combination or combination of combinations as winning is stored in the ROM 41b in advance, and the acquired random value for internal lottery is used as a range of determination values for each combination. It is good also as what performs an internal lottery by comparing with.

  In the above embodiment, the game can be started only by setting 3 as the number of bets in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, even in the normal gaming state, the game can be started by setting 1 as the bet number, and further, the game can be started by setting 2 as the bet number. Also good. As a result, when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the small role in the internal lottery is lowered as compared with the case where 3 is set as the bet number, and the small role is won The number of paid out medals can be increased. For example, when 3 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of Bell is 1 / 4.82 and the payout number is 7, but when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number, The winning probability may be lower than 1 / 4.82 and the payout number may be more than seven. Further, the winning probability of the bell and the number of payouts may be changed when 1 is set as the bet number and when 2 is set.

  In the embodiment, the slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slot machine for setting bets using game balls. Alternatively, it may be a complete credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, the ball capturing device 30 ′ and the ball capturing device 30 ′ for capturing the game ball are used. In addition to a medal payout mechanism such as a hopper motor 34 and a payout sensor 35, a ball payout device 34 ′ for paying out a game ball, a ball payout, and a take-in ball detection switch 31 ′ for detecting the taken game ball A payout ball detection switch 35 ′ for detecting a game ball paid out by the device 34 ′ is provided, and it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using both medals and game balls, and generating a prize. The present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 40 Game control board 41 Main controller 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
90 Production control board 91 Sub control part 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (1)

A variable display device capable of deriving and displaying a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and one game is obtained by displaying the display result in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine that can be awarded according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived, a plurality of types of winnings including a special winning with a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to a player and a winning winning with a game value. A pre-determining means for determining whether or not to allow the occurrence;
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
For each of a plurality of predetermined operation timings, a predetermined derivation is made so that the display result derived to the variable display area can be specified when the derivation operation means is operated at each operation timing. Derived control table storage means for storing a plurality of control tables;
Derivation control table selection means for selecting one of a plurality of derivation control tables stored in the derivation control table storage means according to the determination result of the prior determination means;
A winning display result corresponding to a winning determined by the pre-decision means to be generated is retrieved from display results that can be derived in the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operating means at the operation timing when the derivation operating means is operated. Display result search means for specifying the winning display result;
Derivation control selection for selecting either the first derivation control for deriving the display result specified from the derivation control table or the second derivation control for deriving the winning display result specified by the display result search means Means,
A derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result in a variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on the derivation control selected by the derivation control selection means when the derivation operation means is operated;
With
The derivation control table selection means is determined in the situation where it is determined to allow the generation of the first prize by the pre-determining means and in the situation where the generation of the second prize is determined. Select a common derivation control table,
The derivation control selection means includes
In a situation where it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the first winning is permitted, when a winning display result corresponding to the first winning is not specified by the display result searching means, Selecting the first derivation control;
In a situation where it is determined by the pre-determining means that the first winning is permitted, the display result specified from the derivation control table is a display result that does not correspond to the first winning, When the winning display result corresponding to the first winning is specified by the display result searching means, the second derivation control is selected,
In a situation where it is determined by the pre-determining means that the second winning is allowed to occur, if the winning display result corresponding to the second winning is not specified by the display result searching means, Selecting the first derivation control;
In a situation where it is determined by the pre-determining means that the second winning is permitted, the display result specified from the derivation control table is a display result that does not correspond to the second winning, When the winning display result corresponding to the second winning is specified by the display result searching means, the second derivation control is selected.
A slot machine characterized by that.

Images